Service Manual: Digital Multifunctional System

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE : 00ZAR208D/A1E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
(AR-208S/AR-208D)
MODEL
AR-208S
AR-208D
CONTENTS
[1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used

for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and
IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls,
adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved
on the eyes retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of
servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a
unit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner
cartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected
when removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.
Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,
WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBRCKT.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
LASER WAVE LENGTH : 770 795nm
Pulse times : 10.24sec
Out put power : 0.15mW 0.01mW
VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE L
KATSO STEESEEN.
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRLNING VED BNING, NR
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF
FUNKTION. UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR
STRLNING.
VARNING !
OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL
R PPNAD OCH SPRREN R URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRLEN. STRLEN R
FARLIG.
At the production line, the output power

of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57
MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is
maintained constant by the operation of
the Automatic Power Control (APC).
Even if the APC circuit fails in operation
for some reason, the maximum output
power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1
MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible
emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT
which is still-less than the limit of
CLASS-1 laser product.
Caution
This product contains a low power laser
device. To ensure continued safety do not
remove any cover or attempt to gain access
to the inside of the product. Refer all
servicing to qualified personnel.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA

KUIN TSS KYTTOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KYTTJN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTVLLE
NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT

STT N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVNDAREN UTSTTAS
FR OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING, SOM
VERSKRIDER GRNSEN FR LASERKLASS 1.
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V

model, 230V model and 240V model.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CONTENTS
[1]
7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport

(Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
B. Front copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
8. Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
GENERAL
1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. Note for servicing and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
[3]
Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copy performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPLC printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RSPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. SEC/SECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Toner cartridge replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[4]
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
[5]
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motors, solenoids and clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Cautions on handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Removing protective packing materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Developer unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading the paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
B. Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
C. Setting up Button Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
12. Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
[6]
COPY PROCESS
1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
3. Actual print process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
[7]
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Laser unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Fuser section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Paper transport path and general operations. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Document transport path and basic composition . . . . . . . . . .
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. Cases where a document jam is caused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. RSPF open/close detection (book document detection) . . . .
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-7
7-8
7-8
[8]
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
B. Drum replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
D. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
E. TC unit cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
F. Charger wire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
D. Pressure plate holder attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8. Power section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
B. DV seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
C. DV blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
E. DV sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
12. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A. Front cabinet, rear cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
B. Upper door unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
C. Document tray unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
D. Upper door open/close sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
E. Reverse clutch, paper exit roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
F. Drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
G. Shutter solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
H. Pickup roller, take-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
I. Paper empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
J. PS roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
K. Upper transport roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
L. Paper sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
M. Lower transport roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
N. Paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
[9]
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Main charger (Grid bias) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Duplex adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory
for duplex copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode . . . . . . . . .
5. RSPF scan position automatic adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. RSPF mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
9-1
9-3
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-5
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-8
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Key rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
List of test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Descriptions of various test commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Maintenance display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] USER PROGRAM
1. User programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Copy mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Selecting a setting for a user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1
12-1
12-2
12-3
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
A. Overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Signal name list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. MCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
2. OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
3. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES
1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15-1
15-1
15-3
15-4
15-5
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item
Model
AR-208S
CPM
(Letter)
SB/
MB
20
MB
20
MB
AR-208D
2 Tray
SPF
R-SPF
Opt
(250)
Opt
(250)
Color
Scanner
(push)
GDI
printer
SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter
FAX
Sharp
desk
IEEE
1284
Opt
Opt
USB
RJ45
External
NIC
(2.0Hi)
(2.0Hi)
Opt
Opt
Descriptions of items
CPM:
Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)
SB/MB:
SB = Manual feed single bypass,

MB = Manual feed multi bypass
2 tray:
Second cassette unit
SPF:
Original feed unit
R-SPF:
Duplex original feed unit
Color scanner:
Color scanner function
GDI printer:
GDI printer function with USB
SPLC:
SPLC printer function
E-SORT:
Electrical sort
Duplex:
Auto duplex copy function
Shifter:
Job separator function
FAX:
FAX function
Sharpdesk:
Scanner utilities
IEEE1284:
Interface port (parallel)
USB:
Interface port (USB)
RJ45:
Interface port (Network)
External NIC:
AR-NB2A
(AR-208S/AR-208D)
(Options)
AR-D33
AR-NB2A
Descriptions of table
: Standard provision
: No function or no option available
Opt: Option
AR-FX13
2. Note for servicing and handling

When the main unit power is repeatedly turned OFF/ON rapidly (for about 1sec), the IC (OA982) on the MCU PWB may malfunction to cause an error
(E1-00 Communication error), which does not boot the machine. In case of this error, the blank display is kept for several tens seconds and then "E100" is displayed on the panel display.
<Countermeasure>
Turn off the power and keep it for more than 10sec. Then turn on the power.
When the machine is booted.: There is no problem in the MCU PWB.
When the machine is not booted.: The MCU PWB trouble
AR-208S/208D GENERAL 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications
Item
Type
Copy system
Segment (class)
Copier dimensions
Desktop
Dry, electrostatic
Digital personal copier
20-1/2 (W) x 17-5/8 (D) x 14-5/8 (H) (518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 371mm (H))
20-1/2 (W) x 17-5/8 (D) x 14-5/8 (H) (518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 371mm (H))
43.9lbs.(19.9kg)
DV unit is not included.
45.4lbs.(20.6kg)
AR-208S
AR-208D
AR-208S
AR-208D
Weight (Approximately)
2. Operation specifications
Paper feed
section
Section, item
Paper feed system
Inch
Tray paper feed section
system
Details
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size
Multi-bypass paper
feed section
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
AB system
Tray paper feed section
Multi-bypass paper
feed section
Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper exit section

Originals
Optical
section
Scanning
section
Exit way
Capacity of output tray
Original set
Max. original size
Original kinds
Original size detection
Scanning system
CCD sensor
Lighting lamp
Resolution
Type
Voltage
Power consumption
Output data
Writing
section
Image forming
Writing system
Laser unit
Photoconductor
Charger
Developing
Cleaning
Resolution
Type
Life
Charging system
Transfer system
Separation system
Developing system
Cleaning system
1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets)

8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2"
(Landscape)
15 - 21 lbs.
250 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
User adjustment of paper guide available
Max, feedable size: 8-1/2" x 14" /
Min, feedable size: 3.87" x 5.83"
15 - 34.5 lbs.
50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
56 - 80g/m2
250 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Max, feedable size: A4 / Min, feedable size: 89 x 140mm
56 - 128g/m2
50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
Face down
200 sheets
Center Registration (left edge)
A4 (8-1/2" x 14")
sheet, book
None
3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp
600 dpi
CCFL
560Vrms
2.8W
Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel /
Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual)
Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser
600 dpi
OPC (30)
25K
Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge
(+) DC corotron system
(-) DC corotron system
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
Fusing section
Electrical section
Section, item
Fusing system
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Heater lamp
Power source
Power consumption
Details
Type
Type
Type
Voltage
Power consumption
Voltage
Frequency
Max.
Average (during copying)
Average (stand-by)
Pre-heat mode
Auto power shut-off mode
Heat roller system

Teflon roller
Silicon rubber roller
Halogen lamp
120V
800W
120V
Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Less than 1000W
380Wh/H
80Wh/H
28Wh/H
12.5W or less
3. Copy performance
Section, item
Copy magnification
Fixed magnification
ratios
Details
4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement
(Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%)
(AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%)
25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments)
Zooming
magnification ratios
50 - 200% when using RSPF (151 steps in 1% increments)

5 steps
8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF)
Manual steps (manual, photo)

Copy speed (CPM)
First-copy time *1
(Approximately)
Inch system
8-1/2" x 11"
(Landscape)
AB system
A4 (Landscape)
AB system
B5 (Landscape)
Max. continuous copy quantity
Void
Void area
Image loss
10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON)

Same size
(paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100

20
Same size
20
Same size
20
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Side edge void area
99
1 - 4mm
4mm or less
0.5mm or more (per side)
Leading edge
4.5mm or less (total of both sides)

same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (RSPF)
Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (RSPF)
Warm-up time
Power save mode reset time
Paper jam recovery time
Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (RSPF)

0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
0 sec.
Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open.
*1: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (8-1/2" x 11" (A4), paper fed from paper tray).
The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature.
4. SPLC printer
Print speed
Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed)
First print time

Duplex
ROPM
CPU
Memory
Interface
Network
Emulation
MIB support
Resolution
Supported OS
WHQL support
Application
* Varies depending on the PC performance.

8 sec. (without data transfer time)
Yes (AR-208D only)
Yes
None
64MB
USB2.0 (Hi Speed)
Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A
SPLC (JBIG GDI)
No
600dpi *1
Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista
Yes *2
Status window
*1: Engine Resolution

*2: Running change
5. Scan function
Type
Scanning system
Light source
Resolution
Originals
Output data
Scan range
Flat Bed Color Scanner

Document glass / RSPF
3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (1 pcs of CCFL)
Optical: 600 x 1200dpi Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi
(Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)
Sheet type / Book type
R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit
OC / RSPF: 8.5" (297mm) (L) x 14" (431mm) (W)
Scan speed
Protocol
Support file format
Interface
Scanner utility
Scan key/lamp
Duplex scan
Supported OS
Void area
WHQL supported
Original position: Platen: Left center / RSPF: Right center

OC / RSPF: Max. 2.88ms/line(Color/Gray scale)
TWAIN / WIA (Only XP Vista) / STI
RAW / JPEG
USB2.0 (Hi Speed data transmission)
Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer
Yes
Yes (AR-208D only)
Windows 98/Me, 2000 Professional, XP Home Edition / Professional, Vista
No
Yes *1
*1: Running change
6. RSPF
50 sheets (56 - 90g/m2) or 6.5mm, 1/4" or less.
A4, B5, A5 / 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2"
8-1/2" x 11" about 14 sheets (70%)
Original capacity
Original size
Original replacement speed
Job speed (Tray1,Landscape)
Single copy
Multi copy
Original placement
Original weight
Mixed feeding
Original which cannot
A4 about 13 sheets (65%)

S to S
About 14CPM (8-1/2" x 11") About 13CPM (A4)
S to D
About 10CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~)
D to S
About 6CPM
D to D
S to S
About 20CPM
S to D
D to S
About 16CPM
D to D
Face up
15 - 23.9lbs. (56 - 90g/m2)
No
Thermal papers, originals with punch holes for files, be used folded paper, transparent
originals such as OHP films, stapled or clip used originals with cover up liquid used, Originals
with tape sealed, originals with high level frictional coefficient such as photos or catalogs.
[Conditions] Speed with tray 1, normal size, paper size of 8.5" x 11" (A4), and RSPF.
*1: Indicates the speed from 1st to 30th sheet (i.e., 60th surface).
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply list
A. SEC/SECL
No.
1
Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)
Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag
10
Developer
Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)
10
Drum kit
Drum
Drum fixing plate
10
Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)
Product name
AR-208MT
250K
(25K x 10Pcs)
AR-208MD
25K
AR-152DR
(A4 6% document)
Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208MT includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208MD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR.
Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French.

Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN
2. Environmental
(4)
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the
machine operations are as follows:
(1)
Supply storage condition

Humidity (RH)
90%
Normal operating condition
Temperature: 20C to 25C

Humidity: 65 5%RH
(2)
Acceptable operating condition

Humidity (RH)
85%
20%
60%
5C
45C
3. Production control number (lot No.)

identification
20%
<Toner cartridge>
10C
(3)
30C
35C
Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
Transportation condition
Humidity (RH)
90%
60%
<Drum cartridge>
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.
(SOCC production)
15%
25C
30C
40C
AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
Production month
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it

from the copier
Production control
label attachment position
Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the

collection bag.
Production control
label attachment position(*1)
1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a
China product.
<Developer>
Sub lot
Production day
Production month
End digit of year
Production place
4. Toner cartridge replacement

1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier.
2) Keep holding Toner lover, and
3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.
3
1
AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance
RSPF
Interface
18
10
12
11
5
6
7
3
4
16
1
4
7
10
13
16
Document glass
Paper tray
Bypass tray paper guides
Document feeder cover
Paper output tray
Handles
2
5
8
11
14
17
Operation panel
Side cover
Bypass tray
Document feeder tray
Paper output tray extension
Power cord
3
6
9
12
15
18
Front cover
Side cover open button
Original guides
Exit area
Power switch
USB connector
2. Internal
Toner cartridge
Drum cartridge
2
3
4
5
1
4
Front cover
Transfer charger
2
5
Side cover
Charger cleaner
Fusing unit release lever
AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1
13
14
15
16
17
3. Operation panel
1
AR-208D
Display
READY TO COPY.
100% 8.5x11
18
6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
15
16
[MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators

Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected
mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax mode indicators).
Numeric keys
Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical
settings.
5
7
11
13
15
17
The keys can also be used to select items in function setting

menus.
Power save indicator
This lights up when the power save function is activated.
Error indicator
This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error
occurs.
Tray location indicator
Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the
tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly.
[2-SIDED COPY] key (AR-208D)
[2-SIDED SCAN] key (AR-208S)
Press in copy mode to select one-sided or two-sided settings for
the original and for the output.
[
] key (
), [
] key (
), [ENTER] key
Press the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to select an item in
a function setting menu.
Press the [ENTER] key to enter a selection.
[COPY RATIO] key
Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio.
To select a preset ratio setting, press the [COPY RATIO] key and
select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset,
press the [COPY RATIO] key, select the preset ratio that is
closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [
] key (
)
or [
] key (
) to increase or decrease the ratio in
increments of 1%.
[START] key (
) / Ready indicator
The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is
possible.
To begin copying, press the [START] key (
19
21
6
8
10
12
19
20
17
Display
This shows messages indicating the machine status and any
problems that occur, as well as user programs and function
setting menus.
[CLEAR] key (
)
Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a
job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this
key to move back to the previous menu level.
RSPF indicator
This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF.
[TRAY SELECT] key (
)
Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for
copying.
[MENU] key
Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a
user program or to display the total count.
[E-SORT/SP.FUN] key
Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin
shift function.
14
[EXPOSURE] key
Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or
photo mode.
16
[CLEAR ALL] key (

)
This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in
a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial
state.
18
Shows the current copy ratio.
20
Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the
numeric keys.
).
The [START] key (

) is also pressed to return to normal
operation from auto power shut-off mode.
Shows the selected paper size.
21
A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been

changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift
is selected.
4. Motors, solenoids and clutch

11
12
8
10
3
9
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Part name
Main motor
Scanner motor
Toner motor
Cooling fan motor
Resist roller solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Multi paper feed solenoid
Drive motor
Duplex motor
Shifter motor
Reverse clutch
Paper feed solenoid (RSPF)
Control signal
MM
MRMT
TM
VFM
RRS
CPFS1
MPFS
SPMT
DMT
SFTM
SRVC
SPUS
Function / Operation
Drives the copier.
Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
Supplies toner.
Ventilate the fuser section.
Resist roller rotation control solenoid
Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1
Multi manual pages feed solenoid
Drives the RSPF.
Devices the duplex paper transport section (Duplex model only)
Drives the shifter.
Reverses the rotating direction of the roller.
Feeds paper.
5. Sensors and switches

7
2
1
10
11
5
6
No.
Name
1 Scanner unit home position
sensor
2 POD sensor
3 PPD2 sensor
4 Cassette detection switch
5 PPD1 sensor
6 Door switch
7
8
9
Paper empty sensor

Paper exit sensor
PD1 sensor
10 Upper door open/close sensor

11 Paper sensor
Signal
MHPS
Type
Transmission sensor
Function
Scanner unit home position detection
Output
"H" at home position
POD
PPD2
CED1
PPD1
DSW
Transmission sensor
Transmission sensor
Micro-switch
Transmission sensor
Micro-switch
"H" at paper pass

"L" at paper pass
"H" at cassette insertion
"L" at paper pass
1 or 0V of 24V at door open
SPID
SRJD
PD1
Transmission sensor
Transmission sensor
Micro-switch
Paper exit detection

Paper transport detection 2
Cassette installation detection
Paper transport detection 1
Door open/close detection
(safety switch for 24V)
Paper entry detection
Paper exit detection
Paper width detect
SCOD
SPPD
Transmission sensor
Transmission sensor
Cover open/close detection

Paper transport detection
"H" paper empty

"H" paper empty
"H" at A4 size or less
"L" at A4 size or more
"L" open
"H" paper empty
6. PWB unit
11
9
6
10
4
3
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Name
Exposure lamp invertor PWB
Main PWB (MCU)
Operation PWB
High voltage PWB
CCD sensor PWB
LSU motor PWB
TCS PWB
LSU PWB
FAX-operation PWB
Power PWB
Modem PWB
Function
Exposure lamp (CCFL) control
Copier control
Operation input/display
High voltage control
For image scanning
For polygon motor drive
For toner sensor control
For laser control
FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option)
AC power input, DC voltage control
FAX control (AR-FX13 option)
7. Cross sectional view

3
18
15 16
17
4
19
20
6
7
8
9
10
14
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Part name
Scanner unit
Exposure lamp
LSU (Laser unit)
Paper exit roller
Main charger
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Drum
Transfer unit
Pickup roller
Manual paper feed tray
Manual paper feed roller
PS roller unit
Paper feed roller
Pickup roller
Separation roller
Upper transport roller
Paper exit roller
Lower transport roller
PS roller
13
12
11
Function and operation

Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD).
Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original
Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
Roller for paper exit
Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
Forms images.
Transfers images onto the drum.
Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
Tray for manual feed paper
Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
Picks up documents.
Separates documents to feed properly.
Transports of a document.
Discharges documents.
Transports of a document.
Feeds documents to the scanning section.
[5] UNPACKING AND

INSTALLATION
2. Cautions on handling
1. Copier installation
Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any

object.
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier.
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place,
condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this
condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.
Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours
before use.
Do not install your copier in areas that are:
damp, humid, or very dusty
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.

Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality.
exposed to direct sunlight
Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges

in a dark place without removing from the package before use.
poorly ventilated
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor
print quality.
3. Checking packed components and

accessories
subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near
an air conditioner or heater.
Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included.
Operation manual
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for

easy connection.
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets
the specified voltage and current requirements.
Software CD-ROM
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.

Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
8" (20cm)
4"
(10cm)
8"(20cm)
4"
(10cm)
AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1
Drum cartridge
(installed in unit)
4. Unpacking
6. Developer unit installation
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the machine to unpack

the machine and carry it to the installation location.
1) 2) 3) Open the side and front cabinets of the copier.

4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit.
5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit.
6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.
5. Removing protective packing

materials
1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below and

then open the RSPF and remove the protective materials. Take
out the bag containing the toner cartridge.
4
7) Remove the screw (1 pc).
8) Remove Upper developer unit.
2) Release the scan head locking switch.

Grasp here and turn in
the direction of the arrow.
(A)
Lock
Unlock
3) Open the bypass tray, and then open the side cover while
pressing the side cover open button.
9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer

10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX
roller evenly.
4) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove
the two protective pins from the fusing machine by pulling the
strings upward one at a time.
Protective pins
CAUTION tape
Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer

unit.
11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw.

12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.
2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove
the packing tape, and remove the cushion.
3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.
4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier.

Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction.
Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as
shown with the arrow in the figure below.
(Prevention of splash of developer)
5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the
figure below.
6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.

13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier.
Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be
sure to insert carefully.
14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom
of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a
screw.
15) Completion of Developer unit installation
7. Toner cartridge installation

1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit
with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.
Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter
may drop and Toner unit may drop.
7) Completion of Toner unit installation
Close the front and side cabinets.
8. Loading the paper tray
5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the
edges go under the corner hooks.
Note: Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has
no wrinkles or curled edges.
Note:
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.
Do not load paper above the maximum height line (

Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
).
If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur.

Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When
adding paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a
single stack with the new paper.
Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and
type.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock
in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down on
the pressure plate of the paper tray.
When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between the

paper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too
narrow and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will
cause the paper to skew or misfeed.
3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step
2. To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to secure it as
shown below.
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the machine.

Note:
If you loaded a different size of paper than was loaded previously
in the tray.
Pressure plate lock
When not using the machine for an extended period, remove all
paper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is
left in the machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb
moisture from the air, resulting in paper jams.
4) Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the paper
guide (A) to match the width of the paper, and move the paper
guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.
9. Power to copier
1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF position.
Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at the
rear of the copier.
Paper guide (B)

Paper guide (A)
The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob
on the guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the
paper to be loaded.
The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then
insert it at the indicator line of the paper to be loaded.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.
3) The document stopper may fall down by vibrations during transit
of the product. If documents are set under such a state, the
JAM display may be indicated.
If the JAM display is indicated, remove the documents, turn
OFF/ON the power SW, complete initializing of the RSPF, then
set the documents again.
10. Software
B. Installing the software
The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following

software:
MFP driver
Printer driver
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the
machine.
The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility
that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status,
the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages.
Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when
the machine is used as a network printer.
Scanner driver*
The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the
machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.
Sharpdesk*
Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it
easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications.
Button Manager*
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the
machine to scan a document.
*:
The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are
connected to the machine by a USB cable.
A. Before installation
Hardware and software requirements
Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to
install the software.
Computer type
Operating
system*2 *3
Display
Hard disk free
space
Other hardware
requirements
Note:
The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP.
With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different from those in this manual.
In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation.
If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen
to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation
procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may
have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case,
reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem.
1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make
sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If
this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
Note: The cable will be connected in step 13).
2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon.
In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer",
and then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and
then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4) Double-click the "setup" icon.
In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for
confirmation, click "Allow".
5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure
that you understand the contents of the software license, and
then click the "Yes" button.
IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped

with a USB 2.0/1.1*1
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000
Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4,
Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4
1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit
150 MB or more
Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the language
menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected.
An environment on which any of the operating

systems listed above can fully operate
To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go

to next step.
6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then

click the "Next" button.
7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go
to step 12).
*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000

Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home
Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly
equipped with a USB port.
*2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.
*3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment.
*4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using
the installer.
Installation environment and usable software

The following table shows the drivers and software that can be
installed for each version of Windows and interface connection
method.
Cable
USB
Operating
Printer
Scanner Button
Sharpdesk
system
driver
driver Manager
1
Windows 98/ Available*
Available
Me/2000/XP/
Vista
*1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the
type of connection between the machine and your computer.
Install the software according to the Operation Manual.
8) Click the "MFP Driver" button.
Installing the Utility Software
Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button.

Follow the on-screen instructions.
9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button.

Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears,
click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation.
If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging.
If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be
installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows.
Caution:
If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button.
If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"
button and go to step 12).
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button.

Caution:
A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine
to your computer. Click the "OK" button.
13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable.
Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen
will appear.
14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the
driver.
Caution:
(2) Using the machine as a shared printer

If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow
these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer.
Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see
the operation manual or help file of your operating system.
1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software".
2) Click the "Custom" button.
This completes the installation of the software.

If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as
explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager".
If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will
appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.
(1) Connecting a USB cable

Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.
A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not
included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable
for your computer.
Caution:
USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista preinstalled.
Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver.
The USB cable should be connected during installation of the
printer driver.
3) Click the "MFP Driver" button.

Note
If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your
computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0
MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to
"HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM".
Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista.
Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be
possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting
USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a
higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card.
Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer.
However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed).
1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine.
4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button.
2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.
5) Click the "Add Network Port" button.

In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not
appear.
2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from

the "File" menu.
In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize"
menu.
3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button.
Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer
name of the machine on the network.
5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager T" from the pull-down menu.
7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer

that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the
default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button.
Caution:
8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button.
This completes the installation of the software.
6) Click the "Apply" button.

7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T"
from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do
the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
C. Setting up Button Manager

Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner
driver to enable scanning from the machine.
To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the
scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button
Manager to scanner events.
The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be

changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
(2) Windows 98/Me/2000
(1) Windows XP/Vista

1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and
Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel"
and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and
Cameras".
1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.
Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options".
3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.
In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu.
4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.

5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
11. Interface
A. USB
Connector
4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200
Type-B connector
Cable
Shielded twisted pair cable
(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)
Pin configuration
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T" in "Send to this application".
Signal name
+5V
-DATA
+DATA
GND
12. Moving
Moving instructions
When moving the unit, follow the procedure below.
Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for
the other applications and leave only the Button Manager
checkbox selected.
7) Click the "Apply" button.
8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
Select "Sharp Button Manager T" in "Send to this application"
and click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge
in advance.
1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the
outlet.
2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the
toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that
order.
To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove
the toner cartridge.
3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.
4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place
and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been
stored in the front of the paper tray.
5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.
6) Lock the scan head locking switch.
Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must
be locked to prevent shipping damage.
7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,
and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed
during installation of the unit.
8) Pack the unit into the carton.
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit
3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass.
If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can

alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the
scanner moisture-proof kit described below.
<1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass
holder.
<2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it.
<3> Remove the table glass.
A. Components
Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Scanner condensation
prevention mylar
Optical right hole mylar B
Scanner motor metal plate
cushion
Scanner upper surface cushion
Scanner motor lower mylar
Scanner UPG mylar J3
Fan housing cushion
Part code
PSHEZ0493QSZZ
Qty
3
PSHEZ0469QSZZ
PMLT-0106QSZZ
2
2
3
2
PMLT-0105QSZZ
PSHEP0600QSZZ
PSHEP0599QSZZ
PMLT-0108QSZ1
1
1
1
1
B. Precautions at installation
Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with
industrial alcohol before the work.
C. Attachment method
Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power
plug from the outlet.
1) Detach the RSPF.
Detach the RSPF from the copier and softly place it on top of
the original table as shown below.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.

<1> Unscrew the screw and remove the rear cabinet
shielding plate. (Save the screw.)
4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3

positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below.
Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar.
Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as
much as possible.
Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as
much as possible.
<2> Unscrew three screws and remove the rear cabinet. (Save
the screws.)
<3> Disconnect the connector of the RSPF, and remove the
RSPF from the machine.
1
2
Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the
diagram below).
6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on

the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main
unit.
Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered
with the mylar.
Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion
(the yellow line in the diagram below).
5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown in

the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of the
main unit.
20mm - 25mm
Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar.

Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below).
Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the
diagram below).
Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so

that there will be no gap between them.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below).
Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the
center of the raised part.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the
rear side at the rear side of the main unit.
Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow line
in the diagram below).
9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the

motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit.
Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and
along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram).
Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off
the snap band from the hole.
Do not cover this hole.
Align the edge of the cushion with

the edge of the metal plate.
Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scanner and attach to the surface.
Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so that
it is stuck correctly.
10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the bottom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar.
Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered.
Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the
metal plate (the yellow mark).
Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that
there will be no gap.
Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered.
8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick
together.
Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too.
Stick together.
Stick together.
Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to fill

the gap between the mylar and the metal plate.
13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the position shown in the diagram below.
Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you
see the fan housing from the backside of the machine.
Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed
where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the fan
housing.
11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original
position.
View from
the arrow A
Back side
12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the right
side of inside of the scanner.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in
the diagram.
Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the
edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow
line in the diagram).
Reference position
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm
from the edge.
3 - 7mm
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the
gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear
cabinet is filled for sure.
14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3).
[6] COPY PROCESS

An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.
(Structure of the OPC drum layers)
OPC layer
(20 microns thick)
Pigment layer (0.2
to 0.3 microns thick)
Aluminum drum
1. Functional diagram
Main charger
Laser beam
Cleaning blade
MG roller
Drum
Transfer unit
Resist roller
(Basic operation cycle)
Semiconductor laser
Focus correction lens
Main high voltage unit
Exposure
Charge
Saw tooth
Toner
Drum
Developing
Cleaning
Developer
Cleaning blade
PS roller
Waste toner box
To face
down tray
Paper release
Fusing
Separation
Transfer
Heat roller
Electrode
Transfer charger
Heater lamp
Transfer high
voltage unit
Synchronization
with drum
Manual feed
Cassette
paper feed
Print process
Paper transport route
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 1
2. Outline of print process
Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)
This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser

and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic
Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material.
First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface
and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser
beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface
when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the
print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in
the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure.
A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC
drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance
of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam
(corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes
the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the
drum surface.
Semiconductor laser
Step-1: Charge
Step-2: Exposure
* Latent image is formed on the drum.
Step-3: Developing
Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visible image with toner.
Step-4: Transfer
The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred
onto the print paper.
Exposure
(semiconductor laser)
OPC layer
Pigment
layer
Aluminum
drum
Step-5: Cleaning
Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade.
Step-6: Optical discharge
Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by semiconductor laser beam.
Drum surface charge

after the exposure
3. Actual print process

Step-1: DC charge
A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by
the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of
the Scorotron charger.
Non-image area
Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.
About
DC5.5KV
( 580V/ 400V)
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 2
Image area
OPC layer
Pigment
layer
Aluminum
layer
Step-3: Developing (DC bias)
Step-4: Transfer
A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component

magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier.
The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print
paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the
backside of the print paper.
Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no
negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image
appears on the drum surface.
:Carrier (Magnetized particle)

:Toner (Charge negative by friction)
(N) (S) Permanent magnet
(provided in three locations)
N
S
N
About DC 5.2kV
DC
400V 8V
MG roller
Step-5: Separation
Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it
is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is
connected to ground.
Step-6: Cleaning
Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the
cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section
in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.
Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias.
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 3
Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser)
Start
Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is

radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the
OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state
to the drum surface for the next page to be printed.
1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is

at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier
is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V.
When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the

aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges
on the OPC layer.
Semiconductor laser
2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor

potential is switched from LOW to HIGH.
3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photoconductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the
drum.
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place.
Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence
Function
The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed
during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates
and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong
static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to
retain the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the
voltage gradually against possible power loss.
Charge by the Scorotron charger

Function
Basic function
The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor.
Basic function
A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the
corona current on the photoconductor.
Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time

before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should
stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias
can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal
interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum
surface.
As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main

corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor
potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid
so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable
level.
Process controlling
Function
The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the
semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the
drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing
bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted
to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum.
To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.
Basic function
Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To
make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition
at the developer unit.
0
START
STOP
Print potential
Toner attract
potential
Developing bias
2)
3)
1)
Low
4)
Drum potential
High
Time
AR-208S/208D
COPY PROCESS 6 - 4
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
(Option)
Operation
section
FAX
FAX modem
Scanner section
(Option)
CCD
USB
FAX I/F
Network
Box
Network
USB
Printer/
Scanner I/F
MCU (Main control/image process section)
PC
USB
LSU (Laser unit)

Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens
Laser beam
Paper exit
Fusing section
Process section
Printer section
Paper transport section
Manual paper
feed section
Cassette paper
feed section
(Outline of copy operation)
Printing
Setting conditions
7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum

according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images(toner images).
1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy
density with the operation section, and press the COPY button.
The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.
Image scanning
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts
scanning of images.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and
passed through the lens to the CCD.
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion
3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit
and passed to the MCU.
8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge.
9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner
images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied
paper is discharged onto the exit tray.
(Outline of printer operation)

The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and the
MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above
5) and later.
(Outline of scanner operation)
Image process
4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser
unit) as print data.
The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PC
according to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the operations with the operation panel.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion

5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and
various lenses to the OPC drum.
AR-208S/208D
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1
2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics)
The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images.
Relative sensitivity
It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit
performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving
elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub
scanning direction by moving the optical unit.
B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source.
Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on
the document table. The reflected light from the document is
reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the
reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line
CCD.
The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line
scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color
section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC
scanning)
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
The resolution is 600dpi.

When copying, only the green component is used to print with the
printer.
10
The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by

the service simulation.
Sensitivity
100
100.0
75
6
50.2
50
45.4
25
380
480
580
680
780
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)
(Optical unit)
1
4
7
10
Table glass
Mirror 1
CCD PWB
Original
2
5
8
Optical unit
Mirror 2
Lamp
3
6
9
Lens
Mirror 3
Reflector
C. Drive system
The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley
gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the
shaft.
The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the
belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the
idle pulley to drive the optical unit.
3
1
4
7
4
Scanner motor
Belt 473
Shaft
2
2
5
8
AR-208S/208D
Pulley gear
Belt 190
Idle gear
5
3
6
9
Idle pulley
Optical unit
Table glass
3. Laser unit
B. Laser beam path
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent
to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images
are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and f lens, etc.
The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the f lens, and the mirror to form
images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser
emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order
to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for
measurement of the laser writing start point.
C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the
sub scanning direction
6
No
1
2
3
4
Component
Semiconductor laser
Collimator lens
Cylinder lens
Polygon mirror,
polygon motor
5 BD (Lens, PWB)
6 f lens
Image surface power: 0.18 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 795nm)
Function
Generates laser beams.
Converges laser beams in parallel.
Takes the focus.
Reflects laser beams at a constant
rpm.
Detects start timing of laser
scanning.
Converges laser beams at a spot on
the drum.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at
both ends of the drum same as each
other. (Refer to the figure below.)
Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm

No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces
4. Fuser section
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as
each other.
abc
a
d=e=f
c
f LENS
AR-208S/208D
A. General description
2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 200C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is
set to 100C.
General block diagram (cross section)
Thermal fuse
Separator pawl
3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following

malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy
window.
PPD2
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240C.

b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100C
during the copy cycle.
Separator pawl
c. Open thermistor
d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190C within
27 second after supplying the power.
Thermistor
Pressure roller
Fusing resistor
Heat roller
This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to

improve transfer efficiency.
Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper
that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit
and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to
ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging
brush.
Paper guide
Top view
Heat roller
(4) Fusing resistor
Thermal fuse
Thermistor
Heater lamp
5. Paper feed section and paper

transport section
A. Paper transport path and general operations
4
Separator pawl
(1)
Heat roller
A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller
is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance
and paper separation.
(2)
6
7
8
9
10
Separator pawl
Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and
prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
(3)
Thermal control
1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply

PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control
the temperature in the fuser unit.
To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser
unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.
Heated by the heater

lamp. (800W)
Safety device
(thermal breaker, thermal
fuse)
Triac (in the

power supply unit)
14 13 12
1
Scanner unit
8
Drum
2
Copy lamp
9
Transfer unit
3
LSU (Laser unit)
10 Pickup roller
4
Paper exit roller
11 Manual paper feed tray
5
Main charger
12 Manual paper feed roller
6
Heat roller
13 PS roller unit
7
Pressure roller
14 Paper feed roller
Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of
250 sheets.
The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray
from the front cabinet.
The surface temperature

of the upper heat roller is
sensed by the thermistor.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed operation are given below.
Level of the thermistor is

controlled by the main PWB.
With the signal from the

main PWB, the triac is
controlled on and off.
(power supply PWB)
AR-208S/208D
11
(1)
Cassette paper feed operation
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the
paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial
state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready
lamp.
The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the
clutch sleeve.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts
rotating to drive each drive gear.
The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the
clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the
pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore.
PFS
OFF
OFF
PFS
ON
RRS
OFF
RRS
OFF
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the
tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment.
This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the
clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to
the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the
paper.
PFS
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection
switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from
detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS)
turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact
with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the
pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of
the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing
against skew feeding.
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the
resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting
rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the
paper is transported by the resist roller.
7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through
the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by
the drum curve and the separation section.
PFS
RRS
OFF
OFF
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed
latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve,
stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
AR-208S/208D
RRS
ON
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out
detector) to the copy tray.
(2)
Manual multi paper feed operation
1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid

(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is

engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper
falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating.
ON
OFF
MPFS
MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed

solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed
latch.
A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same
time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual
take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start
paper feeding.
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist

roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image
on the OPC drum.
From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed
operation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.)
5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial
state.
ON
OFF
MPFS
MPFS
AR-208S/208D
(3)
Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed
C. Operational descriptions
a. When the power is turned on:

PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
Time chart (Tray feed)
b. Copy operation
a
PPD1 jam
PPD2 jam
POD jam
Document set
PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning

on the resist roller.
PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the
resist roller.
PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after
turning off the resist roller.
POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning
on the resist roller.
POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec
after turning off PPD2.
SPID ON
Document feed unit lamp ON
PSW ON
MIRM rotation
(Copier side)
MM rotation
6. RSPF section
A. Outline
CPFS ON
The RSPF (Reverse Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AR208D / AR-208S as a standard provision, and it automatically copies up to 50 sheets of documents of a same size. (Only one set of
copies)
Main motor rotation
Copy start
The scanner is shifted
to the exposure position.
(SPF side)
SPFM rotation
2 3
4 5
SPUS ON
Document feed
SPPD ON
Document transport sensor
PPD ON
RRC ON
Synchronization
Document transport
(Transfer)
(Exposure)
(Fusing)
SRJD ON
POD ON
(Document exit)
(Paper exit)
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub

scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjusted
by changing the document transport speed.
10
1
3
5
7
9
Pickup roller
Paper empty sensor
Paper sensor
Lower transport roller
Paper exit sensor
2
4
6
8
10
98
7 6
Separation roller
Upper transport roller
PS roller
Reverse self-weight gate
Paper exit roller
PSW
MRMT
SPF M
CL
SPUS
SPPD
SCANST
1200msec
560msec
SRVC
SRJD
MAIN M
CPFS1
RRS
PPD1
PPD2
POD
AR-208S/208D
SPF motor rotation
Paper feed
Paper transport
B. Document transport path and basic

composition
1
Document set sensor
D. Cases where a document jam is caused

1) The SPPD is ON when turning ON the power.
2) The SPPD does not turn ON for 4.0sec from starting document
feed. (in 100% copy)
3) The SPPD does not turn OFF for 4.7sec after detecting turning
ON of the SPPD. (100% copy)
4) The RSPF cover or the OC cover is opened during document
transportation.
5) The SRJD is ON when the power is turned ON.
6) The SRJD is not turned ON for 2.4sec from release of PS in
paper feed from the document set position. (100% copy)
7) The SRJD is not turned OFF for 1.6sec from completion of document scan in the case of complete document exit. (100%
copy)
E. RSPF open/close detection

(book document detection)
RSPF open/close detection (book document) detection is performed by detecting the interval between the reference lines on the
white Mylar attached to the paper exit guide (document scanning
section) by the scanner (CCD) and detecting the varied quantity.
B
A
(Floating)
(White Mylar)
Reference line
(CCD)
Reference line
B
A
A - B = Varied quantity of pixels

(pixel)
Note: When replacing the carriage unit, be sure to execute TC4106.

If TC41-06 is not executed, the carriage unit may not read
the reference line on the white Mylar, preventing the document from being fed.
7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/

document transport (Duplex model)
A. Initial state
Set duplex documents on the document tray.
Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed
tray cannot be selected.)
B. Front copy
Document transport:
The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed
roller to the PS roller.
The document is exposed in the exposure section, and transported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller
and the paper exit roller.
C. Back copy
Document transport:
By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper
transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the
back surface of the document is exposed.
The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower
transport roller and the paper exit roller.
The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not
discharged completely.)
The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed.
The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the
PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the
document exit section.
The document is discharged to the document exit tray.
Paper transport:
Switchback operation is performed.
The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is

not discharged completely.)
The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and
the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on
the back surface are transferred.
The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is

performed. (To the back copy)
The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to

the paper exit tray.
Paper transport:
The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller,
and the images on the front surface are transferred.
The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower
side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is
not discharged completely.)
The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy)
AR-208S/208D
Rotation copy mode:

The front and the back are in upside down each other.
Copy mode without rotation:
The front and the back are not in upside down.
8. Shifter
Shift width: 2.5cm

The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program.
According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job.
(Default: ON)
AR-208S/208D
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.

(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for

safety.
1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the harness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful
not to disconnect or connect the harness between the
MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN20) during the
machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or connected
during the machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will
be destroyed.)
2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be
sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec
before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains
immediately after turning off the power.)
LO C K
The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the

following sections:
1. High voltage section
(2)
2. Operation panel section

3. Optical section
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
(3)
6. Manual paper feed section

7. Rear frame section
8. Power section
9. DV unit section
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only)
11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only)
12. RSPF section
1. High voltage section
3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage.
If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5)
and later.
If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).
4) Remove the main charger.
(When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the
sawteeth with an air blower.)
A. List
No.
1
2
3
Part name Ref.

Drum
Transfer charger unit
Charger wire
B. Drum replacement
1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)
AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1
5) Remove the cleaning blade.
9) Attach the felt.
: Check while pressing the blade.
Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed.

If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade.
(Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
Cleaning blade
Moquette R
0 0.3 mm
0.2 0.5 mm
Moquette F
0.2 0.5 mm
0 0.3 mm
Sub blade
0 0.5 mm
0 0.5 mm
Cleaning blade
Moquette R
Moquette F
6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove
waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner.
7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely.
Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade.
8) Attach the cleaning blade.
Sub blade
Be careful not to allow the
moquette to cover the sub blade.
Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the
unit and fix it with a screw.
Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.
When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in
the arrow direction and attach.
Example of NG
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade.
Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket on the sub blade.
Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.
If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
10) Attach the main charger.
Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process
frame.
Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove
in the process frame.
When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make
contact with the cleaning blade.
11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.
Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)
2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and

remove the transfer charger.
Lock pawl rear
1)
2)
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade
edge breakage)
Transfer
charger
1)
Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as
shown.
12) Attach the drum cover.
Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.
When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection
gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum
cover to the process frame.
Lock pawl rear
13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged.
D. Assembly procedure
C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit)
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side
cover.
E. TC unit cleaning
1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
1)
1)
2)
2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol.
F. Charger wire replacement

1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.
2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and
(2).
At that time, be careful of the following items.
The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1
The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be
in the range of the projection section.
Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
3)
3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure below.
1)
4)
3)
Charger wire
1)
2)
2)
1)
1mm
Protrusion
1.5mm
Fig.1
2. Operation panel section
A. List
No.
1
2
Part name Ref.

Operation panel unit
Operation PWB
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.
1)
2)
2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation

panel unit.
3. Optical section
A. List
1)
1)
NO.
1
2
3
Part name Ref.

Copy lamp unit
Copy lamp
Lens unit
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.
1)
2)
1)
1)
2)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet.

4) Disconnect the connector.
5) Remove eight screws, and remove the operation PWB.
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
1)
2)
5)
5)
2) Remove the connector and the clamp, and remove the RSPF
unit.
5)
5)
4)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
4)
3)
2)
1)
3) Remove five screws, remove the operation unit, and disconnect

the connector.
11) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.

12) Remove the rod.
4) Remove the right cabinet.

5) Remove the left cabinet.
6) Remove the rear cover.
7) Remove the table glass.
3)
1)
6)
1)
5)
7)
1)
2)
4)
3)
1)
2)
13) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage.
Note: When replacing the carriage unit, be sure to execute TC4106.
1)
1)
8) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure.
If TC41-06 is not executed, the carriage unit may not read

the reference line on the white Mylar, preventing the
document from being fed.
9) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.
4)
10) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the tension, and remove the belt.
2)
3)
2)
4)
3)
1)
1)
4. Fusing section
CCD core
A. List
1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the carriage unit.
2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back
surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from
the attachment surface.
3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the
base plate.
4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex
tape.
5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to
the base plate.
6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name Ref.

Thermistor
PPD2 sensor
Heater lamp
Pressure roller
Heat roller
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit.
7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB.
Note: Attach the FCC to the base

plate securely with duplex tape to
prevent against coming loose.
1)
3)
Note: Attach the FCC to

fit with the marking line.
2)
Marking line.
2)
3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
1)
2)
Thermistor
3)
4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.
7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater
lamp.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Pressure roller section disassembly

5) Remove three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the
right side, and open the heat roller section.
Heater lamp
2)
3)
4)
8) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3
pcs.).
6)
3)
5)
1)
5)
2)
6)
6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
1)
1)
2)
PPD2 sensor
9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
3)
1)
2)
10) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4
pcs.).
Heat roller disassembly

(Continued from procedure (4).)
5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat
roller section.
2)
3)
2)
2)
2)
2)
1)
1)
3)
2)
11) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left
sides.
6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat
roller.
1)
2)
Heat roller
3)
1)
1)
7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.

12) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the
spring.
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk ().
Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with 1.

Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ
Pressure roller
1
1)
3)
3)
2)
1
2)
1)
1)
2)
3)
8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.

Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the
current model.
Current model
AR-208S/208D
Temperature
210C
230C
2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.

3) Remove the fan duct and disconnect the connector. (2 positions)
1)
4) Remove six screws, and remove the scanner unit.
5)
5)
6)
3)
5)
5)
5)
1)
2)
2)
4)
3)
4)
1)
5)
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
5) Disconnect the connector from the MCU PWB.
A. List
6) Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and remove the sensor

PWB.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name Ref.

Paper holding arm
PPD1 sensor PWB
LSU unit
Intermediate frame unit
Paper feed roller
3)
1) Remove the paper holding arm.
Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the
holder from the arm.
2)
1)
2)
1)
2)
3)
4)
7) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.
12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker
unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
1)
1)
2)
13) Remove the connector.

14) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)
8) Remove the roller, and remove the belt.
2)
2)
2)
1)
1)
3)
9) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob.
2)
2)
10) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.
3)
15) Disconnect the connectors.
2)
16) Remove three screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
1)
1)
4)
3)
11) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley,
and the bearing.
2)
2)
2)
1)
1)
2)
1)
17) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
20) Remove five screws and the grounding wire, and remove the
main drive unit.
2)
1)
2)
1)
1)
1)
1)
18) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the
belt.
CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

21) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure
release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
1)
2)
3)
3)
1)
19) Remove the harness guide.
4)
2)
1)
1)
4)
2)
3)
22) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it.
Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.
25) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit.
[Note for installation]
Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b)
so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.
3)
c b
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
5)
1)
2)
4)
23) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.

24) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
frame unit to remove.
3)
3)
26) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley.

27) Shift and remove the shifter unit.
3)
3)
3)
4)
2)
4)
3)
1)
2)
2)
1)
28) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the
gear.
Note: When assembling, turn it to the right and attach.
29) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the
shifter roller.
1)
2)
3)
32) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit.
30) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two
screws, and remove the shifter motor.
33) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS
roller unit.
1)
5)
2)
4)
PS roller unit
Use grease of
Floil FG40H
only to apply to
this section.
4)
PS semi-circular
PS
semi-circuler
earth
plate
earth plate
31) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU.

1)
1)
2)
1)
3)
2)
1)
34) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
1)
36) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.
37) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
Back
5)
Clutch unit
4)
Paper feed
roller
2)
4)
3)
Front
35) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1
sensor PWB.
1)
1)
2)
2)
38) Remove the semi-circular roller unit.

39) Remove the semi-circular rubber.
2)
1)
1)
6. Manual paper feed section

A. List
No.
1
2
3
4
3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper
frame.
1)
Part name Ref.

Manual transport roller
Cassette detection switch
PPD1 sensor PWB
Side door detection unit
1)
Multi unit
1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
1)
2)
2)
4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit
from the multi paper feed upper frame.
2)
1)
2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
2)
2)
1)
Back
Wire treatment
1)
5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller
B9.
7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
1)
1)
1)
1)
3)
2)
Multi paper feed

solenoid
3)
2)
L O CK
T O
6) Remove the pick-up roller.
D. Pressure plate holder attachment

1)
1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.
Seal M1-N
Pressure plate
holder
2)
Attachment
reference
Attachment
reference
7. Rear frame section
7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the

exhaust fan motor.
A. List
Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan.

Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name Ref.

FAX PWB (When the AR-FX13 installed)
Mirror motor
Main motor
Exhaust fan motor
Main PWB
1)
2) Remove the connector.
3)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)
2)
2)
2)
Blowing direction
8) Disconnect the connectors.
9) Remove five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
1)
2)
1)
3)
2)
2)
4) Disconnect the connector.

5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.
2)
1)
3)
1)
2)
3)
2)
1)
2)
2)
6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main
motor.
3)
1)
2)
8. Power section
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
1)
A. List
No.
1
Part name Ref.

Power PWB
2)
1) Disconnect each connector.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.
4)
1)
1)
1)
1)
3) Remove the used developer.

2)
1)
3)
5)
4)
4) Supply new developer.
9. DV unit section
A. Developer
1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove
the TN guide.
B. DV seal
1) Peel off the old DV seal.
2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
1)
3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position.

DV side seal F
DV side seal R
D
0.5
C 0.5
0.5
2)
0.5
B
0
X
Bump
B
X-X
Magnification ratio:
200%
C. DV blade
E. DV sensor
1) Peel off the old DV blade.
1) Remove the Mylar.
2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor.
3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position.
* Clean the sensor (A) section.

A
1)
B
0.5
DV blade IC
2)
3)
2)
DV-BOX AS
B
D. DV doctor
A
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor.

* Clean the edge (A) section.
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only)

A. List
No.
1
1)
Part name Ref.

Duplex motor
A
2)

2) Remove two screws.
1)
3) Remove the Duplex motor cover.

4) Remove the Duplex motor.
Note for installation

1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure.
2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw.
* Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the
figure below.
MG-ROL
DG check
gauge
C
DG sect
F/R :1.5 ion
DG se 5
:1. ctio 0.15
5
n
0.1
0
DG check
position
* After checking the DG,

apply screw lock.
FRONT
20
10
10
110
REAR
20
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor

gear with the belt on the main body side.
DG check
gauge
DG check
gauge
DG check
gauge
1
2
11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only)
12. RSPF section
A. List
A. Front cabinet, rear cabinet
No.
1
(1)
Part name Ref.

Reverse roller
Open the upper door unit.
1) Remove four screws

2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire
3) Remove the reverse unit.
(2)
Front cabinet and rear cabinet removal

2) Disengage the five pawls.
3) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
3
3
2
1
1
4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
2
2
1
B. Upper door unit

1
1) Release the shaft on the front side.

2) Remove the upper door unit.
1
2
C. Document tray unit
(2)
Paper exit roller removal
1) Release the shaft on the front side.
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the tray unit.
2) Slide the bearing.

3) Remove the paper exit roller.
5) Remove the bearing.
F. Drive unit
(1)
Transport unit removal
Note for reassembly
1) Disconnect four connectors.
Use care so that the paper exit Mylar in not pinched between the
paper exit roller and the follower roller.
2) Remove the harness from the clamp.

3) Remove the snap band.
4) Remove one screw.
D. Upper door open/close sensor
5) Remove the earth wire.
1) Disconnect one connector.
2) Remove the upper door open/close sensor.
7) Disconnect the RSPF harness.
1
1
5
4
3
6
1
2
E. Reverse clutch, paper exit roller

(1)
Reverse clutch removal

7

2) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Remove the reverse clutch.
1
2
Note for reassembly
Attach the stopper of the reverse clutch along with the rib on the
motor mounting plate.
8) Remove four screws.
G. Shutter solenoid
9) Remove the transport unit.
(1)
8
8
Shutter solenoid unit removal
1) Remove the harness from the edge saddle.

3) Remove the shutter solenoid unit.
3
Note for reassembly
Before assembly, be sure to check that the harness is passed
through the rib.
Note for reassembly
Arrange the RSPF harness to the outside of the base tray so that it
is nit pinched before assembly.
Install the paper feed solenoid under the state where the projection
of the paper feed planet arm is lower than the paper feed solenoid
lever.
(2)
Drive unit removal
(2)
1) Remove three screws.
Shutter solenoid removal
1) Remove the paper feed solenoid spring from the shutter solenoid.
2) Remove the drive unit.
2) Remove the paper feed solenoid lever.
2
1
(3)
Drive motor removal
1) Remove the gear.

Note for reassembly
3) Remove the drive motor.
When assembling, use care so that the paper feed solenoid spring
does not extend out of the paper feed solenoid lever.
3
2
1
Note for reassembly

Connect the connectors according to the arrow indication marked
on the motor mounting plate.
H. Pickup roller, take-up roller
(4)
(1)
1) Disengage one pawl.
Paper feed unit removal
Pickup roller removal
2) Remove the pickup drive gear from the pickup roller.

2) Side the bearing.
3) Remove the stopper arm.
4) Release the paper feed shaft pressure release spring.

5) Remove the paper feed unit.
6) Remove the paper feed shaft release arm.
1
5
1
I. Paper empty sensor

2
Paper feed PG unit removal
1) Remove the harness.

2) Remove three screws.
(2)
(1)
3) Lift the front side, and remove the paper feed PG unit.
Parts removal

2) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Slide the shaft.
4) Remove the spring pin.
4
3
1
(2)
Paper feed PG support plate removal
(3)
Paper feed roller removal
2) Slide and remove the paper feed PG support plate.
1) Pull out the shaft.

2) Remove the clutch boss and the clutch spring from the pickup
roller.
2
1
(3)
Paper empty sensor removal
(3)
Scan plate removal
1) Remove the scan plate.
2) Remove the paper empty sensor.
2
1
(4)
J. PS roller
(1)
PS roller removal
1) Remove the PS roller.
Parts removal
1) Remove the gear.

2) Remove the pulley.
3) Remove the belt.
K. Upper transport roller

(1)
Parts removal
1) Remove the gear.
2) Remove the upper transport release arm.

(2)
Parts removal
5 4
2) Remove the earth wire.

5) Open the scan plate.
2 3
4
1
4
3
5
Note for reassembly
Use care so that the rib on the upper transport release arm catches
the guide.
Note for reassembly

Pass the earth wire through the hole to the outside of the frame,
then install parts.
(2)
Upper transport roller removal
1) Remove the upper transport roller.
(2)
Lower transport roller removal

2) Remove the gear.
4) Remove the lower transport roller.
L. Paper sensor
2) Remove the paper sensor.
3
1
N. Paper exit sensor

(1)
OC mat removal
1) Remove the OC mat.
2
1
M. Lower transport roller

(1)
Reverse self-weight gate removal
1) Remove the reverse self-weight gate.
(2)
Paper exit sensor removal

2) Remove the paper exit sensor.
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.

Main scanning direction magnification ratio
1. Optical section
Copy image dimensions

Original dimension
X 100 (%)
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment

The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning
direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use TC 4801.
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)

Original (Scale)
mm
1/2mm
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
HARDENED
STAINLESS
130
140
150
Shizuoka
(1)
Outline
The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made manually.
The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (The zoom data
register set value is changed for adjustment.)
Paper feed
direction
mm
1/2mm
20
100
110
120
130
140
150
Shizuoka
Reference
Comparison point
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by

changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.
(2)
HARDENED
STAINLESS
JAPAN
10
Copy
110
Main scanning/sub scanning direction

magnification ratio adjustment
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.
a. Cases when the adjustment is required

1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Necessary tools
7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the main scanning direction copy

magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [/] key.
Mode
Scale
c. Main scanning direction adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long
scale for precise adjustment.)
Main scan direction

magnification ratio
OC mode sub scan
direction magnification ratio
Display Default
LED
item
value
F-R
50
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN
50
SCAN mode lamp
8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
[START] key.
9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is
within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is
changed by 0.1%.
d. Sub scanning direction adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a
long scale for precise adjustment.)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

Mode
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.

4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
using the formula below.
Copy image dimensions
Original dimension
X 100 (%)
110
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
JAPAN
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
20
10
100
110
120
JAPAN
140
Paper feed
direction
150
Comparison point
50
COPY mode lamp

2nd cassette lamp
50
COPY mode lamp
50
Manual paper feed

lamp
PRINT mode lamp
50-10
Main cassette lamp
* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as

1to2/Long Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting.
(1)
Shizuoka
Reference
Main cassette lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models,

skip.
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
130
TC
The modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
150
Shizuoka
mm
1/2mm
Print center offset

(Main cassette paper
feed)
(*) Print center offset TRAY2
(2nd cassette paper
feed)
Print center offset
MFT
(Manual paper feed)
SIDE2
2nd print center
offset (Main cassette
paper feed)
Original (Scale)
mm
1/2mm
Display
Default
LED
item
TRAY1
50
COPY mode lamp
Lead edge adjustment
1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper or OC cover.
Copy
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the

specified range. (100 1.0%).
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.
7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the sub scanning direction copy
magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [/] key. (SCAN
mode lamp ON)
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
[START] key.
Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual
copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified
range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is
changed by 0.1%.
B. Image position adjustment

The employed test commands and the contents are as follows:
Mode
Print start position
(Main cassette paper
feed)
(*) Print start position
(2nd cassette paper
feed)
(Manual paper feed)
Display
Default
LED
item
TRAY1
50
COPY mode lamp
TRAY2
MFT
Image lead edge void DEN-A

amount
Image scan start
RRC-A
position
Image rear edge void DEN-B
amount
50
TC
Main cassette
lamp
COPY mode lamp
2) Execute TC 50 - 01
3) Set the print start position (A: AE mode lamp/COPY mode lamp
ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT mode lamp/PRINT
mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: PHOTO mode lamp/
SCAN mode lamp) to 1, and make a copy of the scale at 100%.
4) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
2nd cassette lamp
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is

decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
50
COPY mode lamp
50
Manual paper
50-01
feed lamp
PRINT mode lamp
5) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the
image print start position.
50
SCAN mode lamp
6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
50
COPY mode lamp
When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by

about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is
regarded as 0.)
PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp
Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)

When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is
moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).
* The RSPF adjustment is made by adjusting the RSPF image

scan start position after OC adjustment.
(Example)
Document guide
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm
Image loss, R = 4mm
Center
5mm
Copy paper
(A4 or 8 1/2 11)
10mm
2) Execute TC 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette

paper feed) adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
(2)
Image rear edge void amount adjustment
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper

size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2"
x 14" paper.
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly
positioned.
The standard value is 0 2mm from the paper center.
2.0mm or less
(Copy A)
Copy image
B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper
Shift
Copy paper
folding line
A4 size rear edge

2.0mm or less
(Copy B)
Copy image
Shift
Copy paper
folding line
(Paper feed direction)
2) Execute TC 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amount

adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the

set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted
by 0.1mm toward the rear frame.
Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm)
For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed
adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.
Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the
CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
Scale image
2. Copy density adjustment

Paper rear edge
A. Copy density adjustment timing

The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following
cases:
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change

the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
The default value is 50.
(3)
When maintenance is performed.

When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
When the optical section is cleaned.
When a part in the optical section is replaced.
Center offset adjustment
1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment
so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide.
When the optical section is disassembled.
Test chart for the center position adjustment.

Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper
transport direction.
When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
When the OPC drum is replaced.

When the main control PWB is replaced.
When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
B. Note for copy density adjustment

1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment
Clean the optical section.
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range.
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment
(2)
One of the following test charts:

UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE
1) Execute TC 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute TC 4602.
B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select

key. Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment.
(Except for the auto mode.)
The user program AE setting should be "3."

1
10
Perform the adjustment in each mode.
W
TEXT
(1) Exposure mode, level display
| | | | |
Test chart comparison table

UKOG0162FCZZ
DENSITY
No.
UKOG0089CSZZ
DENSITY
No.
KODAK
GRAY
SCALE
(2) Mode select key

1
0.1
0.2
0.3
10
0.5 1.9
19
D. Features of copy density adjustment

For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used.
List of the adjustment modes
Auto Mode
Manual Mode
Photo Mode
Manual T/S
mode
T/S Auto mode
Brightness 1 step only

Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 1 step only
E. Copy density adjustment procedure

The copy density can be adjusted in 300dpi or in 600dpi.
Main code
46
Sub code
01
02
Resolution for copy density adjustment

300dpi
600dpi
For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.
(1)
Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting
1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14"
x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document
cover.
Adjustment
mode
Auto mode
Display
item
AE
COPY mode lamp
Text mode
TEXT
PRINT mode lamp
Photo mode
PHOTO
SCAN mode lamp
Text T/S mode
TSTXT
Auto T/S mode
TSAE
PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
LED
Sharp gray chart

adjustment level
"3" is slightly
copied.
"3" is slightly
copied.
"3" is slightly
copied.
"3" is slightly
copied.
"3" is slightly
copied.
3) Make a copy.
Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the
exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
Non toner
save mode
10
10
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
Toner save
mode
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy

quantity display.
(When too dark):
Increase the value displayed on the copy

quantity display.
* The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.
White paper
Test chart
3. High voltage adjustment
4. Duplex adjustment
A. Main charger (Grid bias)
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in

memory for duplex copying
Note:
Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10M or more
measurement.
After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do
not reverse the sequence.
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3
(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the
negative side to the frame ground (power frame).
3) Execute TC 8-02. (The main charger output is supplied for 30
sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is
580 12V.
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a

document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.
That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing
mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image
data is once stored in memory.
The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document
delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the
OC mode)and stored in memory.
This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.
In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be
adjusted by changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
5 10
VRG1
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown

below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.
Scale (S-D mode)
Scale (D-S mode)
B. DV bias check
Note: A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1G must
be use for correct check.
The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can
be made.
Procedures
3) Execute test command 50-18.
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.

2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1
(DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power
frame).
3) Execute TC 25-01 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and
check that the output is 4008V.
VRDV
Mode
OC memory reverse
output position
RSPF memory reverse
output position
Display
item
OC
SPF
Default
LED
50
COPY mode lamp
50
PRINT mode lamp
Select the RSPF memory reverse output position, and press

[START] key to make a copy.
Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than
4.0 mm in the RSPF mode.
An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
image loss.
Front edge of paper
The front edge of the

scale on test chart
less than 4 mm
Void area
5 10
2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
Document guide
The trailing edge has a scale
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy

mode
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end
void) in duplex copying.
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from
the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to
make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part.
Table glass
3) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp
and make the printing mode in OC-D mode.
Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale
on the image.
Void position to be check
There are two adjustment modes:
Paper
1) Image cut rear end void quantity (RSPF) 50-19 (SCAN mode
lamp)
The size (length) of a document read from the RSPF is
detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity
at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (PRINT mode lamp)
This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image
cut trailing edge void quantity (RSPF) is adjusted.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
(Adjustment range; 1 99)
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set
value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every
copy.)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased
by about 0.1mm.
Mode
Paper rear edge void
amount
(Duplex back surface)
Display
item
DEN-B
RRC-D
Default
LED
50
PRINT mode lamp
50
SCAN mode lamp
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface

is shown above.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1
of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2)
Image cut trailing edge void quantity (RSPF)
1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown

below.
* The initial value of duplex setting is 2to2.
Scale (D-D mode)
(Adjustment procedure)
(1)
Paper trailing edge void quantity
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)
2) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode

lamp(on the operation panel) and make the printing mode in the
D-D mode.
3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during
this adjustment.
4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase
of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area.
l Void position to be checked
5. RSPF scan position automatic

adjustment
6. RSPF mode sub scanning direction

magnification ratio adjustment
Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the RSPF scan

glass and the OC glass together, and close the RSPF.
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the

OC mode adjustment in copying has been completed.
When test command 53-08 is executed, the current adjustment

value is displayed as the initial display.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a

normal copy (100%) on the front and the back surfaces to make
a test chart.
* Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 =

about 0.127mm
* If the values are kept as the default values, RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may
be scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from
the home position to the RSPF scan position with the adjustment
value displayed. The RSPF glass cover edge position is calculated
from the difference between the RSPF glass cover edge and the
OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED
lights up with the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again,
execution is performed again.
Display
item
AUTO
Mode
RSPF scan position
auto adjustment
RSPF scan position
manual adjustment
MANU
Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale
in paralled with the edge lines.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a duplex copy (D-D
or D-S) in the normal ratio (100%).
Default
LED
COPY mode lamp
3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.

If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
PRINT mode lamp
4) Execute TC 48-05.
The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)
5) The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification

ratio correction value is displayed in two digits on the display
section.
To select SIDE1 and SIDE2, use [/] keys.
OK/ERR display in AUTO
6) Enter the set value and press the start key.
Operation
<When OK>
53-08 SPF AUTO
AUTO 100% **
When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select

single/duplex after entering the one page print mode,
performing 2-page single copy.
<When ERR>
OK
53-08 SPF AUTO

AUTO 100% **
ERR
Mode
Sub scan magnification ratio
adjustment on the surface of
RSPF document
Sub scan magnification ratio
adjustment on the surface of
RSPF document
Display
item
SIDE1
SIDE2
Default
LED
50
COPY
mode lamp
50
PRINT
mode lamp
* When there is no document in RSPF, copy is inhibited.

<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment
mode
Sub scanning
direction
magnification
ratio (RSPF
mode)
6cm or more is required.
Spec value
TC
At normal:
1.0%
48-5
Set value
Add 1:
0.1% increase
Reduce 1: 0.1%
decrease
Setting
range
1 99
7. Automatic black level correction

a. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Adjustment procedure
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level
adjustment of white balance.
When test command 63-02 is executed, the current correction value
is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the
left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate
left center.
10
Chart back surface
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans

the chart and calculates the correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on
the LCD.
* Default: 0
* If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
c. Operation
1) Initial display
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
0
2) [ENTER/START] Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby
mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES

1. Entering the test command mode
To enter the serviceman test command mode, press the keys as follows:
[#] key [*] key [C] key [*] key
To cancel the test command mode, press the [CA] key.
2. Key rule
[10KEY]:
Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE

Selection of an item
Setup of an adjustment value in case of test commands for adjustment
[/]:
Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
[ENTER/START]: Settlement
<In case of test commands for print>
[ENTER]:
Settlement (Without print)
[START]:
Settlement/Print
[C]:
(Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy.
In case of test command of operation check, terminates the operations.
[CA]:
Exits from the test command mode.
For a test command of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00).
3. List of test commands

Main Sub
Contents
code code
1
01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK)
02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display
(MHP-SENSOR)
06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING)
2
01 Reversing Single Pass Feeder (RSPF) aging
(SPF AGING)
02 RSPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR)
03 RSPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK)
08 RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check
(SPF SPUS CHK)
09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check
(RSPF SPFS CHK)
3
03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK)
5
01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK)
02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check
(HT LAMP CHK)
03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK)
6
01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS)
operation check (PSOL CHK)
02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check
(RES.R SOL CHK)
7
01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM
(W-UP/AGING)
06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING)
08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE)
8
01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.)
02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.)
03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.)
06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.)
9
01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.)
(AR-208D only)
02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check
(DPLX ROT.REV.) (AR-208D only)
04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment
(DPLX ROT.SPEED) (AR-208D only)
10
Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR)
14
Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.)
Main Sub
Contents
code code
16
U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.)
20
01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.)
21
01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE)
22
01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT)
02 Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET)
04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT)
05 Total counter display (TTL CNT)
06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT)
08 RSPF counter display (SPF CNT)
11 FAX-related counter display
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT)
13 CRUM type display (CRUM TYPE)
14 ROM version display (ROM VER.)
16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (AR-208D only)
17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT)
18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT)
19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT)
21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT)
22 RSPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT)
24
01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.)
04 RSPF counter clear (SPF CLR.)
05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (AR-208D only)
06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.)
07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.)
08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.)
09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.)
10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.)
13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.)
14 RSPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.)
15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.)
25
01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK)
10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)
AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1
Main Sub
Contents
code code
26
02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF)
03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY)
04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX)
06 Destination setting (DESTINATION)
07 Machine conditions check (CPM)
20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE)
30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK)
37 Cancel of stop at developer life over
(DVLP LIFE END)
39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK)
40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from
completion of printing to turning OFF the motor)
(LSU MOTOR OFF)
42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING)
43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID)
54 life correction setting (GAMMA CTRL)
62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)
30
01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR)
41
06 OC cover float detection level adjustment
(OC FLOAT LEVEL)
07 OC cover float detection margin setting
(OC FLOAT MGN)
43
01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP)
04 Fusing temperature setting in multi copy
(FU TEMP MULTI)
05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy
(FU TEMP DPLX) (AR-208D only)
14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START)
46
01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300)
02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600)
12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode
(Collective adjustment)
13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text)
14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text)
15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine)
18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300)
19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE)
20 RSPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF)
29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600)
30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT)
31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS)
32 Copier color reproduction setting
(COLOR REAPPEAR)
39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment
48
01 Mains can/sub scan direction magnification ratio
(COPY MAG.)
05 RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in
copying (RSPF MAG.)
49
01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)
Main Sub
Contents
code code
50
01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE)
06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (RSPF)
(RSPF EDGE)
10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER)
12 Document feed off-center adjustment
(ORG.OFF-CENTER)
18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy
(DPLX REVERSE)
19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment
(DPLX END EDGE) (AR-208D only)
51
02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.)
53
08 RSPF scan position automatic adjustment
(SPF AUTO)
61
03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK)
63
01 Shading check (SHADING CHK)
02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL)
12 Light quantity stable wait time setting
(LT.STABLE TIME)
13 Light quantity stable width setting (LT.STABLE RNG.)
64
01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.)
66
01 FAX soft SW setting
02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment
values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
03 FAX PWB memory check
04 Signal send mode (Max. value)
05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value)
07 Image memory content print
10 Image memory content clear
11 300bps signal send (Max. value)
12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value)
13 Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
17 DTMF signal send (Max. value)
18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value)
21 FAX information print
24 FAST SRAM clear
30 TEL/LIU status change check
33 Signal detection check
34 Communication time measurement
37 Speaker sound volume setting
38 Time setting/check
4. Descriptions of various test commands

Main
code
1
Sub
code
01
Contents
Details of function/operation
Mirror scan (SCAN CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the COPY mode lamp. (When the
mirror is in the home position, the lamp lights up.)
During operation, the copy lamp lights up.
When [C] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to
the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 100% +
2) [ZOOM]
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 78% +
02
Mirror home position sensor

(MHPS) status display
(MHP-SENSOR)
2) []
3) [ENTER/START]
01-01 SCAN CHK

- 99% +
01-01 SCAN CHK

EXECUTING... -
78% +
2) []
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 101% +
[Function]
Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "COPY mode lamp" turn on during
the sensor ON status.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
01-02 MHP-SENSOR
EXECUTING...
06
Mirror scan aging (SCAN

AGING)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the
set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "COPY mode lamp." (The lamp is
ON when the mirror is in the home position.)
During aging, the copy lamp is ON.
01
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is acquired and duplex document transport is performed in the case of RSPF.
Reversing Single Pass

Feeder (RSPF) aging
(SPF AGING)
However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of
a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD.
02
RSPF sensor status display

(SPF SENSOR)
[Operation]
[Function]
The ON/OFF status of the RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD.
When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD.
Sensor
Document set sensor
RSPF document transport sensor
RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor
RSPF paper exit sensor
Display item
SPID
SPPD
SDSW
SPOD
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-02 SPF SENSOR
03
RSPF motor operation check

(SPF MOTOR CHK)
2) When the sensor is ON:

02-02 SPF SENSOR
SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding
to the set magnification ratio.
[Operation]
Main
code
2
Sub
code
08
Contents
RSPF paper feed solenoid

operation check
(SPF SPUS CHK)
[Function]
The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by
the use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-08 SPF SPUS CHK
EXECUTING...
09
RSPF reverse solenoid

operation check
(RSPF SPFS CHK)
[Function]
The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the
use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK
EXECUTING...
03
Shifter operation check

(SHIFTER CHK)
[Function]
The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
03-03 SHIFTER CHK
EXECUTING...
01
Operation panel display

check (LCD/LED CHK)
[Function]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all
pixels ON).
After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left
lower side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted
simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub
code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms)
When [C] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode.
<Key input check mode>
When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the LCD displays 0.
When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the
value.
Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted.
When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check
mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec.
When [C] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time,
the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed.
When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time,
the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed.
(Note in the key input check mode)
Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into
the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status)
Multi key input is ignored.
[Operation]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
1) Initial display
2) When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode.
<Key input check mode>
1) Initial display
2) [ENTER/START]
05-01 LCD/LED CHK.
05-01 LCD/LED CHK.

0
**
Main
code
5
Sub
code
02
Contents
Fusing lamp, cooling fan

operation check (HT LAMP
CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for
500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
05-02 HT LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...
03
Copy lamp ON check

(C-LAMP CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
05-03 C-LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...
01
Paper feed solenoid

(CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS)
operation check (PSOL
CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms
and OF for 500ms 20times.
When [//10KEY] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched.
Code number
0
1
2
Setting
CPFS1
CPFS2
MPFS
Remark
Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.
[Operation]
2) [/10KEY]
1) Initial display
06-01 PSOL CHK
0:CPFS1
06-01 PSOL CHK

2:MPFS
2) [/10KEY]
3) [ENTER/START]
06-01 PSOL CHK

1:CPFS2
06-01 PSOL CHK

EXECUTING...
4) Returns to the initial display.
02
Resist roller solenoid (RRS)

operation check (RES.R
SOL CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for
500ms 20 times.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
06-02 RES.R SOL CHK
EXECUTING...
01
Check of warm-up display

and aging with JAM (W-UP/
AGING)
[Function]
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the test command is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every
second from 0 and displayed.
When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [CA] key is pressed, the ready lamp
lights up.
After that, enter the copy quantity with [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec).
To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which causes hardware reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
2) After 10sec
07-01 W-UP/AGING
07-01 W-UP/AGING
0
10
Main
code
7
Sub
code
06
Contents
Interval aging (INTERVAL

AGING)
[Function]
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
Enter the copy quantity with the [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is
executed again to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated.
To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which executes
hardware reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display (Basic display of copy)
READY TO COPY
100%
A4
08
Shift to copy with warm-up

display (W-UP C-MODE)
[Function]
Enter the test command code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every
second from 0 and displayed.
When [CA] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is
stopped. However, warm-up is continued.
After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from test
command 7-01.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
2) After 10sec
07-08 W-UP C-MODE
07-08 W-UP C-MODE

0
01
Developing bias output

(DVLP BIAS SET.)
10
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec.
When, however, an actual output value is measured, use test command 25-01.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-01 DVLP BIAS SET.
EXECUTING...
02
Main charger output (Grid

HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage HIGH move.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-02 MHV(H) SET.
EXECUTING...
03
Main charger output (Grid

LOW) (MHV(L) SET.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage LOW move.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-03 MHV(L) SET.
EXECUTING...
06
Transfer charger output

(THV SET.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-03 THV SET.
EXECUTING...
Main
code
9
Sub
code
01
Contents
Duplex motor normal

rotation check (DPLX ROT.)
(AR-208D only)
[Function]
Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-01 DPLX ROT.
EXECUTING...
02
Duplex motor reverse

rotation check (DPLX
ROT.REV.) (AR-208D only)
[Function]
Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-02 DPLX ROT.REV.
EXECUTING...
04
Duplex motor rotating speed

adjustment (DPLX ROT.
SPEED) (AR-208D only)
[Function]
When this Test Command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key. The entered value is
stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value
is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is.
(Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
8( 1-13)
10
Toner motor operation

(TONER MOTOR)
2) [10KEY]
7( 1-13)
3) [ENTER/START]
7( 1-13)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
10-00 TONER MOTOR
EXECUTING...
14
Cancel of trouble other than

U2 (TRBL CANC.)
[Function]
Used to cancel troubles other than U2.
Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware
reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
14-00 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED
16
U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL

CANC.)
[Function]
Used to cancel U2 trouble.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewritten and hardware reset is made.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
16-00 U2 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED
20
01
Maintenance counter clear

(M-CNT CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" is
displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
20-01 M-CNT CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
Main
code
21
Sub
code
01
Contents
Maintenance cycle setting

(M-CYCLE)
[Function]
The code of the currently set maintenance cycle value is displayed (initial display) and the set
data are saved.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
Setting
3,000 sheets
6,000 sheets
9,000 sheets
13,000 sheets
25,000 sheets
Free (999,999 sheets)
Remark
Default
[Operation]
1) The current set value is
displayed.
21-01 M-CYCLE
4:25,000
( 0-5 )
2) [/10KEY]
21-01 M-CYCLE
5:FREE
( 0-5 )
3) [ENTER/START]
21-01 M-CYCLE
5:FREE
( 0-5 )
2) [/10KEY]
21-01 M-CYCLE
3:13,000
( 0-5 )
22
01
Maintenance counter display

(M-CNT)
[Function]
The maintenance counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-01 M-CNT
***,***
02
Maintenance preset display

(M-CNT PRESET)
[Function]
The quantity (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with TC21-01 is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-02 M-CNT PRESET
***,***
04
JAM total counter display

(JAM TTL CNT)
[Function]
The JAM total counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-04 JAM TTL CNT
***,***
05
Total counter display (TTL

CNT)
[Function]
The total counter value is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-05 TTL CNT
***,***
06
Developer counter display

(DVLP CNT)
[Function]
The developer counter data is acquired and displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-06 DVLP CNT
***,***
08
RSPF counter display

(SPF CNT)
[Function]
The RSPF counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-08 SPF CNT
***,***
Main
code
22
Sub
code
11
Contents
FAX-related counter display

(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
The FAX-related counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT COUNTER
1:PAGE
2:TIME
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 2
2) Select 1
TX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx
RX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx
SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx
RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx
12
Drum counter display

(DRUM CNT)
("xxx,xxx" is the current value.)
("xxxx: xxx. xx" is the current value.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
[Function]
The drum counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-12 DRUM CNT
***,***
13
CRUM type display (CRUM

TYPE)
[Function]
When the test command is executed, the CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is
displayed.
Code number
00
01
02
03
99
CRUM type
Not set
BTA-A
BTA-B
BTA-C
Conversion
Display item
0
BTA-A
BTA-B
BTA-C
CONVERSION
[Operation]
1) The CRUM type is displayed.
22-13 CRUM TYPE
01:BTA-A
14
ROM version display (ROM

VER.)
[Function]
The P-ROM version is displayed.
Press [//10KEY] to switch the display version.
Code number
0
1
2
Version
Main unit Program
F-IMC Program
LCD DATA
Display item
MAIN PROG.
F-IMC PROG.
LCD DATA
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-14 ROM VER.
MAIN PROG.
00.00
2) [/10KEY]
22-14 ROM VER.
F-IMC PROG.
00.00
2) [/10KEY]
22-14 ROM VER.
LCD DATA
00.00
16
Duplex counter display

(DPLX CNT) (AR-208D only)
[Function]
The duplex counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-16 DPLX CNT
***,***
Main
code
22
Sub
code
17
Contents
Copy counter display

(COPIES CNT)
[Function]
The copy counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-17 COPIES CNT
***,***
18
Printer counter display

(PRT.CNT)
[Function]
The printer counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-18 PRT.CNT
***,***
19
Scanner mode counter

display (S-MODE CNT)
[Function]
The scanner mode counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-19 S-MODE CNT
***,***
21
Scanner counter display

(SCAN CNT)
[Function]
The scanner counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-21 SCAN CNT
***,***
22
RSPF JAM counter display

(S JAM CNT)
[Function]
The RSPF JAM counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-22 S JAM CNT
***,***
24
01
JAM total counter clear

(JAM TTL CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-01 JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
04
RSPF counter clear

(SPF CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-04 SPF CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
05
Duplex counter clear

(DPLX CLR.)
(AR-208D only)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"
is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-05 DPLX CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
Main
code
24
Sub
code
06
Contents
Developer counter clear

(DVLP CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-06 DVLP CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
07
Drum counter clear (DRUM

CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-07 DRUM CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
08
Copy counter clear (COPIES

CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-08 COPIES CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
09
Printer counter clear

(PRT.CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-09 PRT.CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
10
FAX counter clear (FAX

CLR.) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-10 FAX CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
13
Scanner counter clear

(SCAN CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-13 SCAN CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
14
RSPF JAM total counter

clear (S JAM TTL CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-14 S JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
15
Scanner mode counter clear

(S-MODE CLR.)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-15 S-MODE CLR.
CLEARED
000,000
Main
code
25
Sub
code
01
Contents
Main motor operation check

(MAIN MOTOR CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a
duplex model) is operated for 30sec.
To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main
charger, and the grid are also outputted.
In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also
operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the
high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.
To check the developing bias, install the developing unit.
After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK
EXECUTING...
10
Polygon motor operation

check (LSU CHK)
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec.
After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine
goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
25-10 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...
26
02
(R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set (R)SPF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired (R)SPF and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code number
SPF
0
SPF NO
1
SPF YES*
2
RSPF YES
* Cannot be executed.
03
Second cassette setting

(2ND TRAY)
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the
code number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [ENTER/START] key to
save the setting.
Code number
0
1
04
Main unit duplex setting

(DPLX)
Display item
SPF OFF
SPF ON
RSPF ON
Second cassette
Second cassette NO
Second cassette YES
Display item
OFF
ON
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired duplex and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
Duplex
Duplex NO
Duplex YES*
Display item
OFF
ON
* AR-208S: cannot be executed.

[Operation]
Main
code
26
Sub
code
06
Contents
Destination setting
(DESTINATION)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired destination and press [ENTER/START] key to save the
setting.
Code number
0
1
2
3
Destination
Inch series
EX Japan AB series
Japan AB series
China (EX Japan AB series + China paper support)
Display item
INCH
AB
CHINA
Code numbers 2 and 3 cannot be selected for the AR-208S and the AR-208D.
07
Machine conditions check

(CPM)
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
CPM
20 CPM
Copy quantity
20
Remark
[Operation]
1) The machine setting is displayed.
26-07 CPM
20 CPM
20
Rear edge void setting (END

EDGE)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the
code number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [ENTER/START] key to
save the setting.
Code number
0
1
30
CE mark support control

ON/OFF (CE MARK)
Cancel of stop at developer

life over (DVLP LIFE END)
Memory capacity check

(MEM.CHK)
Remark
Default
Setting
CE mark support control OFF
CE mark support control ON
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default (100V series)
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number
corresponding to the desired setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
39
Display item
OFF
ON
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed.
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press
[ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
37
Setting
Rear edge void NO
Rear edge void YES
Setting
Stop at developer life over
Cancel of stop at developer life over
Display item
STOP
NONSTOP
Remark
[Operation]
[Function]
When the test command is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is
displayed.
Code number
8
16
Setting
8 MBYTE
16 MBYTE
Remark
[Operation]
1) Memory capacity display
26-39 MEM.CHK
8 MBYTE
Main
code
26
Sub
code
40
42
Contents
Polygon motor OFF time

setting (Time required from
completion of printing to
turning OFF the motor) (LSU
MOTOR OFF)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number
corresponding to the desired setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Transfer ON timing control

setting (TC ON TIMING)
Code number
0
1
2
3
Setting
0sec
30sec
60sec
90sec
Display item
0 SEC.
30 SEC.
60 SEC.
90 SEC.
Remark
Default
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the currently set value of the transfer ON timing is displayed (initial display), and the set value is saved.
Mode
Front surface paper lead edge
Front surface paper rear edge
Back surface paper lead edge
Back surface paper rear edge
Display item
F-REAR
F-END
B-REAR
B-END
<Front/back surface of paper lead edge

adjustment table>
Code
0
1
10
11
12
21
Setting
0 msec
20 msec
2 msec
0 msec
+2 msec
+20 msec
Remark
Default
The default value, "11," of the transfer ON
timing indicates "236msec passed from PS

release."
When set to "0," it is same as setting to the
default, "11."
The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to
236msc 2ms.
Default
11
50
11
50
Setting range
0 21
1 99
0 21
1 99
<Front/back surface of paper rear edge

adjustment table>
Code
1
49
50
51
99
Setting
98 msec
2 msec
0 msec
+2 msec
+98 msec
Remark
Default
The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing
indicates "210msec passed from PPD1

OFF."
The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to
210msec 2ms.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
<Front surface lead edge setting>
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-REAR
11( 0-21 )
2) [/] Mode selection
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END
50( 1-99 )
3) [10KEY] Value entry

26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END
51( 1-99 )
4) [ENTER/START] Settles the entered
value. The display is shifted to the sub
code input standby menu.
Main
code
26
Sub
code
43
Contents
Side void amount setting

(SIDE VOID)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 10, Default: 4 (= One side
2.0mm))
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Setting
0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
4.5 mm
5.5 mm
Remark
Default
When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:
Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of Set value x
0.5mm is made.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
2) [10KEY]
26-43 SIDE VOID

4( 0-10)
54
life correction setting

(GAMMA CTRL)
3) [ENTER/START]
26-43 SIDE VOID

5( 0-10)
26-43 SIDE VOID

5( 0-10)
[Function]
Used to set the life correction.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
(Setting range: 0 1, default: 1)
Code number
0
1
62
Energy-save mode copy

lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)
Setting
OFF
ON
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the
desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1
30
01
Paper sensor status display

(P-SENSOR)
Setting
Copy lamp OFF
Copy lamp half-ON
Display item
OFF
ON
Remark
Default
[Operation]
[Function]
The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD.
Sensor
Paper exit sensor
No. 1 tray paper width sensor
No. 2 tray paper width sensor
Paper entry sensor
Duplex sensor
No. 2 tray paper feed sensor
Display item
POD
PD1
PD2
PPD1
PPD2
PPD3
Remark
Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed.
The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
30-01 P-SENSOR
2) When sensor ON
30-01 POD PD1
PPD1 PPD2 PPD3
PD2
Main
code
41
Sub
code
06
Contents
OC cover float detection

level adjustment (OC FLOAT
LEVEL)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [ENTER/START]
key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF scan position to acquire the OC cover
float detection level.
When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed.
If the detection level is not acquired, ERR display is made. (Default: 0)
Note that, this test command must be executed with the OC cover closed.
If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
0
2) [ENTER/START]
EXECUTING...
<Canceling - when C/CA key is pressed->

After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) When the level is acquired:
**** OK
3) When the level is not acquired:
**** ERR
07
OC cover float detection

margin setting (OC FLOAT
MGN)
[Function]
For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF scanning position saved in 41-06:
(OC cover float detection level adjustment), if the number of pixels between the markers when
processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it is judged
as the float error.
When the set value of this test command is "0," no float error occurs.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key. The setting is saved and the
display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
Setting range: 0 99 (Copes with margin 0 99 pixels.)
Default: 30 (30 pixels)
43
01
Fusing temperature setting

(Normal copy) (FU TEMP)
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [//
10KEY] key to change the setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting into the
EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Set temperature (C)

170
175
180
185
190
195
200
205
210
Remark
Default
Mode
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed
Manual paper feed
Display item
TRAY1
MFT
The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
[Operation]
1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed
& 2nd cassette paper feed setting>
43-01 FU TEMP
TRAY1
6( 0-8 )
2) [/] Mode selection
43-01 FU TEMP
MFT
6( 0-8 )

43-01 FU TEMP
MFT
7( 0-8 )
4) [ENTER/START] Settles the entered
value. The display is shifted to the sub
code input standby menu.
Main
code
43
Sub
code
04
Contents

in multi copy
(FU TEMP MULTI)
[Function]
For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the
temperature set with test command 43-1 to the temperature set with this test command.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code
number and press [ENTER/START] key to change the setting.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Set temperature (C)

165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
Remark
Mode
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed
Manual paper feed
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed (small-size)
Manual paper feed (small-size)
Display item
TRAY1
MFT
TRAY1 SH
MFT SH
Default
3
3
3
3
The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
05

in duplex copy (FU TEMP
DPLX) (AR-208D only)
[Operation]
[Function]
In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this test command is applied to the
fusing temperature.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
14
Fusing start temperature

setting (FU TEMP START)
Shift temperature (C)

0
-8
-6
-4
-2
0
+2
+4
+6
+8
Remark
Default
[Operation]
[Function]
When this test command is started, the currently set code number is displayed.
Press [//10KEY] to switch the setting, and press [ENTER/START] key to save it to the
EEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set temperature (C)

160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
205
210
Remark
Default
[Operation]
Main
code
46
Sub
code
01
Contents
Copy density adjustment

(300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300)
[Function]
Copy density is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too.
Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the
LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99)
The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation.
Mode
AE mode (300dpi)
TEXT mode (300dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)(300dpi)
TS mode (AE)(300dpi)
Display item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
Default
50
50
50
50
TSAE
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
4) [START] Fixing and printing value (No
change on the LCD)
1) Initial display
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 50( 1-99)
Print is started in the set mode.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300

AE
100% 62( 1-99)
2) [] Mode selection
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
TSAE 100% 50( 1-99)
4) To fix the set value without printing, press

[Enter] key.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300

AE
100% 62( 1-99)
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300

TEXT 100% 50( 1-99)
To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,
press any key.

When performing the AE mode exposure
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300

AE
100% 62( 1-99)
02
Copy density adjustment

(600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600)
adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is
not covered.
[Function]
Copy density is set for each mode.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too.
Mode
AE mode (600dpi)
TEXT mode (600dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi)
TS mode (AE) (600dpi)
Display item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
Default
50
50
50
50
TSAE
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
Main
code
46
Sub
code
12
Contents
Density adjustment in the

FAX mode (Collective
adjustment) (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value
and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value.
All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value.
For the density adjustment table data, refer to TC46-13 (density adjustment (normal text) in the
FAX mode).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED

of [START] key is turned off.
AUTO
XX
("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of

normal text stored on the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value.
ADJUST
EXP.
AUTO
YY
ADJUST
SCAN
EXP.
AUTO
YY
4) Print is started (self print).

ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
AUTO
YY
After completion of printing, returns to 2)

display.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment

value.)
13
FAX mode density

adjustment (normal text)
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored
data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value.
Density adjustment value data table
Mode
STD (Normal text)
Fine (Fine text)
Sfine (Super fine)
Photo
off
on
off
on
off
Exposure adjustment value
When initializing each data: 50

[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
STD
XX
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the
FAX side.)
adjustment value with [10KEY].
ADJUST
EXP.
STD
YY
3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED

of [START] key is turned off.
ADJUST
SCAN
EXP.
STD
YY
4) Print is started (self print).

ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
STD
YY

display.

value.)
14
FAX mode density

adjustment (Fine text)
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment
(normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.
3) Scan start (self print)

FINE
XX
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on
the FAX side.)
ADJUST
EXP.
ADJUST
SCAN
EXP.
FINE
YY
4) Print start (self print)

ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
AUTO
YY

display.
FINE
YY

value.)
Main
code
46
Sub
code
15
Contents
FAX mode density

adjustment (Super fine)
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment
(normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST
EXP.

ADJUST
SCAN
S-FINE
XX
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on
the FAX side.)
ADJUST
EXP.
EXP.
S-FINE
YY

ADJUST
PRINT
EXP.
S-FINE
YY

display.
S-FINE
YY

value.)
18
Image contrast adjustment

(300dpi) (GAMMA 300)
[Function]
Contrast is set for each mode.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Mode
AE mode (300dpi)
TEXT mode (300dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi)
TS mode (AE) (300dpi)
Display item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
Default
50
50
50
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
TSAE
50
SCAN mode lamp

COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
No density display on LCD.
[Operation]
Main
code
46
Sub
code
19
Contents
Exposure mode setting (AE

MODE)
[Function]
< table setting>
When this test command is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed. (Default: 2)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [/] key to
change the mode and write into the EEPROM.
<AE operation mode>
When setting the table, press [] key to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set
code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [/] key
to change the mode and write into the EEPROM.
<PHOTO image process setting>
When [] key is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO
image process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is
displayed. (Default: 1)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press
[/] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM.
Mode
Display item
GAMMA
AE
AE
PHOTO
PHOTO
Code number
1
2
0
1
1
2
Setting content
Image quality priority mode
Toner consumption priority mode
Lead edge stop
Real time process
Error diffusion process
Dither process
Remark
Default
Default
Default
[Operation]
1) Initial display
< table setting>
46-19 AE MODE
GAMMA
2( 1-2)
3) [10KEY] Value input
46-19 AE MODE
AE
0( 0-1)
46-19 AE MODE
PHOTO
1( 1-2)
20
RSPF exposure correction

(EXP.LEVEL SPF)
46-19 AE MODE
AE
1( 0-1)
4) [ENTER/START]
Save
the set value. The
machine goes to the sub
code entry standby mode.
[Function]
Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the RSPF mode. The adjustment is made by
adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy.
When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy
becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 99)
Mode
RSPF
Display item
SPF
Default
50
[Operation]
Remark
Main
code
46
Sub
code
29
Contents
Image contrast adjustment

(600dpi) (GAMMA 600)
[Function]
Contrast is set for each mode.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Mode
AE mode (600dpi)
TEXT mode (600dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)(600dpi)
Display item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
Default
50
50
50
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
TSAE
50
SCAN mode lamp

COPY mode lamp
TS mode (AE)(600dpi)
SCAN mode lamp

No density display on LCD.
30
AE limit adjustment (AE

LIMIT)
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save).
Change the setting and press [ENTER/START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The
machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
By pressing [/] key, setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 31, Default: 0)
Mode
Limit value for AE
Limit value for AE (toner save)
Display item
AE
TEXT
Remark
<Remark>
When test command 26-06 (Destination setting) or test command 46-19 Auto Exposure mode
is changed, the setting of this test command is also changed to the default in connection.
31
Image sharpness
adjustment (SHARPNESS)
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode.
Image quality
Blurring
Standard
Sharpening
Setting No
0
1
2
Remark
Default
When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 1)
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions.
To change the mode, press [/] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on
the LCD.
Mode
AE mode
TEXT mode
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
TS mode (AE)
Display item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
Default setting
1
1
1
1
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
TSAE
SCAN mode lamp

COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
Main
code
46
Sub
code
32
Contents
Copier color reproduction

setting (COLOR
REAPPEAR)
[Function]
Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be
copied can be switched.
Set value
0
1
2
Colors easy to be copied

Purple, Blue, Red
Water blue, Green, Blue
Yellow, Red, Green
Colors difficult to be copied

Yellow, Green, Water blue
Purple, Red, Yellow
Blue, Water blue, Purple
This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.
When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 0)
Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are
changed for used in copying.
To change the mode, press [/] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on
the LCD.
Specification component
Green
Red
Blue
Mode
AE mode (including TS)
TEXT mode (including TS)
PHOTO mode
39
FAX mode sharpness

adjustment (Executable only
Setting No
0
1
2
Remark
Default
Display item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
Default setting
0
0
0
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value,
and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
Sharpness adjustment value data table
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Mode
STD
FINE
S-FINE
FINE/PHOTO
S-FINE/PHOTO
Sharpness adjustment value
When initializing each data: 1

[Operation]
1) Initial display
SHARPNESS SETTING
PRESS ,
2) [/] or after 2sec
4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [10KEY].
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2)
Y
Every time when [] key is pressed, the

second line is changed in the sequence
of No. 1 2 3 4 5 1.
("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment

value.)
When [] key is pressed, the sequence

is reversed.
SHARPNESS SET (1-5)

1:STD
3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of
[START] key is lighted.
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2)
X
("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD,
FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/
PHOTO.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to 2) display.
SHARPNESS SETTING
SCAN
Y
SHARPNESS SETTING
PRINT
Y
display.
("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on
the FAX side.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to 2) display.
Main
code
48
Sub
code
01
Contents
Main scan/sub scan

(COPY MAG.)
[Function]
Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY]. Press [START] key to save the set value and make a
copy. (When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by
0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99,
Default: 50)
Mode
Main scan direction magnification ratio
OC mode sub scan direction
magnification ratio
05
RSPF mode sub scan

in copying (RSPF MAG.)
Display item
F-R
SCAN
Default value
50
50
LED
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to display the current RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD.
When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a
copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by
0.1%.)
Default: 50)
When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex Single," single copies of two sheets are
performed.
For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level,
Density mode = MANUAL
Density level = 3
Mode
Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment
on the front surface of RSPF document
Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment
on the back surface of RSPF document
Initial value of
duplex setting
S-S
Display
item
SIDE1
D-S
SIDE2
When there is no document in RSPF, copy is inhibited.
[Operation]
Default
LED
50
COPY
mode lamp
PRINT
mode lamp
50
Main
code
49
Sub
code
01
Contents
Download mode
(DOWNLOAD MODE)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, "DLOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD and the
machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM.
Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program.
During writing, the display shows as follows:
After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.
Status
Download data receiving
Loader function transfer
Date delete start
Data write (Boot section)
Data write (Program section)
Data write (EEPROM)
Data write (LCD)
During SUM CHECK
During BOOT SUM CHECK
During EEPROM SUM CHECK
Download complete
Display item
RECEIVING
LOADER COPYING
FLASH ERASE
BOOT WRITING
PROGRAM WRITING
E2PROM WRITING
LCD DATE WRITING
FLASH ROM SUM CHECK
BOOT SUM CHECK
EEPROM SUM CHECK
DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!
In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD.

Error status
PC data receiving
Loader function transfer
FLASH ROM delete
Boot section FLASH ROM write
Program section FLASH ROM write
Loader section SUM CHECK
Boot section SUM CHECK
Program section SUM CHECK
E2PROM SUM CHECK
E2PROM write
E2PROM read Verify
E2PROM collating Verify
Boot section lens check
Program section lens check
E2PROM lens check
Total data size check
IMC communication error
IMC FRASH ROM write
LCD section lens check
LCD section FLASH ROM write
LCD section SUM CHECK
Display item
E-01 PC TRANS
E-02 LOADER COPY
E-03 FLASH ERASE
E-04 BOOT WRITE
E-05 PROGRAM WRITE
E-06 LOADER SUM
E-07 BOOT SUM
E-08 PROGRAM SUM
E-09 E2PROM SUM
E-10 E2PROM WRITE
E-11 E2PROM READ
E-12 E2PROM COLLATE
E-13 BOOT LENGTH
E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH
E-15 E2PROM LENGTH
E-16 DATE SIZE
E-17 IMC TRANS
E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE
E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH
E-20 LCD DATE WRITE
E-21 LCD DATE SUM
To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a test
command. With the power OFF, press and hold [CA] + [], turn on the power.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
DOWNLOAD MODE
Main
code
50
Sub
code
01
Contents
Lead edge image position

(LEAD EDGE)
[Function]
Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The
adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50)
When [/] key is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the
paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by
0.1mm.)
Mode
Print start position (Main cassette
paper feed)
(*) Print start position (2nd cassette
paper feed)
Print start position (Manual paper
feed)
Image lead edge void amount
Display item
TRAY1
Default
50
TRAY2
50
MFT
50
DEN-A
50
Image scan start position
RRC-A
50
Image rear edge void amount

(Cassette paper feed)
DEN-B
50
Image rear edge void amount

(Manual paper feed)
RRC-B
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Adjustment procedure]
1) Set the print start position (A: AE mode lamp/COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void
amount (B: TEXT mode lamp/PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: PHOTO
mode lamp/SCAN mode lamp) to zero, and make a copy of the scale at 100%.
2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.
Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead
edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).
4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or
less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.)
The RSFP adjustment is made by adjusting the RSPF image scan start position after OC
adjustment.
(Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm
Image loss, R = 4mm
5mm
10mm
[Operation]
Main
code
50
Sub
code
06
Contents
Copy lead edge position

adjustment (RSPF)
(RSPF EDGE)
[Function]
Used to adjust the RSPF copy lead edge.
When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the
scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm.
The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position.
Default: 50)
When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the RSPF
by pressing [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Mode
Front surface document scan
position adjustment
Back surface document scan
position adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment
(RSPF)
Initial value of
duplex setting
S-S
Display
item
SIDE1
D-S
S-S
Default
LED
50
COPY mode lamp
SIDE2
50
PRINT mode lamp
END
50
SCAN mode lamp
When there is no document in the RSPF, copy is inhibited.

10
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning
document.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When
the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the
center is shifted to left.
The modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to
cause black streaks on the edges. When the RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the
RSPF by [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Print center offset

adjustment (PRT.OFFCENTER)
Mode
Print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
(*) Print center offset
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (Manual paper feed)
(**) 2nd print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
Display item
TRAY1
Default
50
TRAY2
50
MFT
50
SIDE2
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(**) : For Simplex models, skip.
When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC
regardless of duplex setting.

12
Document feed off-center

adjustment (ORG.OFFCENTER)
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99,
Default: 50)
When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left.
Mode
Platen document scan
SPF document front scan
RSPF document back scan
Initial value of
duplex setting
S-S
S-S
D-S
Display item
Default
LED
OC
SPF
RSPF
50
50
50
COPY mode lamp

PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
[Operation]
Main
code
50
Sub
code
18
Contents
Memory reverse position

adjustment in duplex copy
(DPLX REVERSE)
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set correction value is displayed.
Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 99, Default: 50)
For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy
operation is performed from the rear edge of documents.
When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows:
In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image,
When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference
position is on the rear edge, and use this test command to adjust the set value so that the print
lead edge is matched.
Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data
from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data
position stored in memory by the set value of this test command.
Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made
by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory.
Mode
OC memory reverse output
position (AR-208D only)
RSPF memory reverse
output position
Initial value of
duplex setting
S-D
Display item
Default
LED
OC
50
COPY mode lamp
SPF
50
PRINT mode lamp
D-S
Document transport direction

Print lead edge
Lead edge void (1)
Document transport direction

Scan lead edge
Scan end position

(Default: Scan cut by void (1))
Scan direction
Rear edge void

Print rear edge
Scan rear edge
The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the
simplex model.
19
Duplex copy rear edge void

adjustment (DPLX END
EDGE) (AR-208D only)
[Operation]
[Function]
Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center
value: 50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range; 1
99)
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The
paper information is cleared for every copy.)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm.
Mode
Paper rear edge void amount
Print start position (Duplex back surface)
Display item
DEN-B
RRC-D
Default
50
50
LED
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the
RSPF setting.
[Operation]
Main
code
51
Sub
code
02
Contents
Resist amount adjustment

(RESIST ADJ.)
[Function]
Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the RSPF resist roller onto
paper. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key to save the set value and make
a copy.
Mode
Main cassette paper fed
Display item
TRAY1
Default
50
LED
COPY mode lamp
TRAY2
50
Main cassette lamp

COPY mode lamp
MFT
50
2nd cassette lamp

COPY mode lamp
SIDE1
50

COPY mode lamp
(*) 2nd cassette paper feed

Manual paper feed
RSPF document paper feed
(Front surface)
PRINT mode lamp

SCAN mode lamp
RSPF document paper feed

(Back surface)
SIDE2
(*) Duplex back surface
DUP-2
50
Main cassette lamp

COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
50
Main cassette lamp

PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
53
08
[Operation]
[Function]
Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the RSPF scan glass and the OC glass
together, and close the RSPF.
RSPF scan position

automatic adjustment
(SPF AUTO)
When this test command is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display.
Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm
If the values are kept as the default values, RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front
area of the proper scan position may be scanned.

In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the
RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The RSPF glass cover edge position
is calculated from the difference between the RSPF glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If
abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed
again.
Mode
RSPF scan position auto adjustment
RSPF scan position manual adjustment
Display item
AUTO
MANU
Default
1
1
LED
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)
OK/ERR display in AUTO
<When OK>
53-08 SPF AUTO
AUTO 100% **
61
03
HSYNC output check (LSU

CHK)
<When ERR>
OK
53-08 SPF AUTO

AUTO 100% **
ERR
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated
for 30sec.
At that time, the COPY mode lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
61-03 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...
Main
code
63
Sub
code
01
Contents
Shading check (SHADING

CHK)
[Function]
Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading
and the copy lamp is lighted.
When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one
pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD. (3 digits)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
63-01 SHADING CHK
EXECUTING...
000
02
Black level automatic

correction (BLACK LEVEL)
[Function]
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance.
When this test command is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of
12bit hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the
density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of
the plate left center.
10
Chart back surface
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the
correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD.
Default: 0
If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
000
2) [ENTER/START] Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->

After canceling, the machine goes into the sub
code entry standby mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR
12
Light quantity stable wait

time setting (LT.STABLE
TIME)
[Function]
Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the
light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the
target during the wait time, the set time of this test command is ignored and the operation
enters the stable evaluation process.)
When this test command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored
and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Setting range: 0 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 99sec.)
Default: 15 (15sec)
[Operation]
Main
code
63
Sub
code
13
Contents
Light quantity stable width

setting (LT.STABLE RNG.)
[Function]
When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level
sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is
within the range set with this test command, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note:
The magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.)
When this test command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored
and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Setting range: 1 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 99 in 4095 gradations.)
Default: 16
64
01
[Operation]
[Function]
The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the
print command is received from the host, printing is made.
Self print (1by2 mode)

(SELF PRT.)
When this test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
(Since, however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.)
Enter the code number and press [ENTER/START] key to start paper feed from the selected
cassette and print in the selected pattern.
Code number
0
1
2
3
Pattern
1by2
Grid pattern
White paper
Black background
Display item
1 BY 2
CHECK
WHITE
BLACK
For 4 99, flip.
66
01
FAX soft SW setting

FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
[Function]
Use to check the FAX soft SW setting.
Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ENTER FAX SOFT SW. #
(3 DIGITS)
SW.___
2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To

enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.),
and the press [ENTER] key.
No.###
CHANGE?
xxxxxxxx
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
display.
3) Select 1
No.###
xxxxxxxx
USE # KEY
12345678
4) Change with 1-8 of [10KEY] and the
press [ENTER] key.
No.###
STORED?
xxxxxxxx
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
display.
5) Select 1
STORED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
02
FAX soft SW initializing

(excluding the adjustment
values) (Executable only
[Function]
Use to initializing FAX soft SW.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
INITIALIZED
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Main
code
66
Sub
code
03
Contents
FAX PWB memory check

FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the FAX PWB memory.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT CHECK MEMORY
PRESS ,
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
2 3 1.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT MEMORY (1-3)
1:DRAM
SELECT MEMORY (1-3)

2:SRAM
SELECT MEMORY (1-3)

3:FLASH
3) [ENTER] key
CHECKING MEMORY
4) After completion of check
When the result is OK
In case of address bus

check error
In case of data bus check

error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT

OK
MEMORY CHECK RESULT

XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG
MEMORY CHECK RESULT

XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG
In case of sum check error
In case of data check error
In case of erase check error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT

XXXXXXXX SUM
NG
MEMORY CHECK RESULT

XXXXXXXX DATA
NG
MEMORY CHECK RESULT

XXXXXXXX ERASE NG
04
Signal send mode (Max.

value) (Executable only
[Function]
Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value).
Facsimile test command design specifications.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NO SIGNAL
33600bps(V34)
31200bps(V34)
28800bps(V34)
26400bps(V34)
24000bps(V34)
21600bps(V34)
19200bps(V34)
16800bps(V34)
14400bps(V34)
12000bps(V34)
9600bps(V34)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
7200bps(V34)
4800bps(V34)
2400bps(V34)
14400bps(V33)
12000bps(V33)
14400bps(V17)
12000bps(V17)
9600bps(V17)
7200bps(V17)
9600bps(V29)
7200bps(V29)
4800bps(V27ter)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS)
No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [/] / 2sec after
Pressing [] key or [] key reverses the sequence.
No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL
.....
No. (1-35)
35:LINE ON HOOK
3) [ENTER] key
Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
2400bps(V27ter)
300bps(FLAG)
2100Hz(CED)
1100Hz(CNG)
300bps(V21)
2100Hz(ANSam)
DUMMY RING
NO VOICE ANSWER
NO RING BACK TONE
LINE OFF HOOK
LINE ON HOOK
Main
code
66
Sub
code
05
Contents
Signal send mode (Soft SW

set value) (Executable only
[Function]
Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value).
Facsimile test command design specifications.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NO SIGNAL
33600bps(V34)
31200bps(V34)
28800bps(V34)
26400bps(V34)
24000bps(V34)
21600bps(V34)
19200bps(V34)
16800bps(V34)
14400bps(V34)
12000bps(V34)
9600bps(V34)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
7200bps(V34)
4800bps(V34)
2400bps(V34)
14400bps(V33)
12000bps(V33)
14400bps(V17)
12000bps(V17)
9600bps(V17)
7200bps(V17)
9600bps(V29)
7200bps(V29)
4800bps(V27ter)
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
2400bps(V27ter)
300bps(FLAG)
2100Hz(CED)
1100Hz(CNG)
300bps(V21)
2100Hz(ANSam)
DUMMY RING
NO VOICE ANSWER
NO RING BACK TONE
LINE OFF HOOK
LINE ON HOOK
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS)
No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [/] / 2sec after
Pressing [] key or [] key reverses the sequence.
No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL
.....
No. (1-35)
35:LINE ON HOOK
3) [ENTER] key
Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
07
Image memory content print

FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to print the image memory content.
[Operation]
When print is allowed
PRINT STORED
After completion of printing,
FAX control is terminated.
10
Image memory content clear

FAX is installed.)
When there is no print data

NO DATA
When print is inhibited

CAN NOT PRINT
After 2 sec, FAX control is

terminated.
After 2 sec, FAX control is

terminated.
[Function]
Use to clear the image memory content.
[Operation]
When there are some print data
CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY
After completion of memory clear, the buzzer
sounds.
CLEARED
PLEASE POWER OFF
When there are no print data

CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY
After completion of memory clear
CLEARED
Remains unchanged until the power is turned

off.
Main
code
66
Sub
code
11
Contents
300bps signal send (Max.

[Function]
Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ,
2 3 4 5 6 1.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL
.....
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)

6:00001
3) [ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
12
300bps signal send (Soft

SW set value) (Executable
installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ,
2 3 4 5 6 1.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL
.....
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)

6:00001
3) [ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
Main
code
66
Sub
code
13
Contents
Dial test (Executable only

[Function]
Use to the dial test.
[Operation]
Dial test (PULSE)
Dial test (DTMF)
1) Initial display
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE
2:DTMF
SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE
2:DTMF
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is termi-
nated.
2)
2) Select 1
INPUT MAKE TIME
(0-15)
Select 2
SELECT HIGH LEVEL

1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
__
3) Enter the make time in 2 digits.

INPUT DIAL #
XXXX
XXXX: Default
After deleting with [CLEAR] key,
3)
Select 1
input can be made.
Select 2: Returns to 2) display.
5) Select 1
Switched to 10/20PPS set with
pulse selection inside.
6) After setting
SENDING yyPPS xxms
7) After completion of sending
TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO
8) Select 1
TERMINATED
Select 2
INPUT VALUE
(0-15)
SEND yyPPS xxms

1:YES 2:NO
"xx" is the input value.
__
SELECT LOW LEVEL

1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
4) [ENTER] key
"yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20.
Select 2
INPUT VALUE
(0-15)
__
4) Select 1
INPUT DIAL #
XXXX
XXXX: Default
After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be
made.
4) [ENTER] key
H:xx
1:YES 2:NO
L:yy
"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.

5) Select 1
HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside.
6) After setting the signal send level
SENDING DTMF
7) After completion of sending
TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO
8) Select 1
TERMINATED
17
DTMF signal send (Max.

[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
INPUT DIAL #
2) [10KEY] input
3) Communication is started after setting the

signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
The content selected with signal send

level selection is set inside.
Main
code
66
Sub
code
18
Contents
DTMF signal send (Soft SW

set value) (Executable only
[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
3) Communication is started after setting the

signal send level.
INPUT DIAL #
SENDING SIGNAL SSW

PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input
The content selected with signal send
level selection is set inside.
21
FAX information print

FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to print the FAX information.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
PRESS ,
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2
3 1.
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
1:USER SW. LIST
SELECT REPORT (1-3)

2:SOFT SW. LIST
SELECT REPORT (1-3)

3:PROTOCOL
3) [ENTER] key
When print is allowed
PRINT STORED
After completion of printing,
FAX control is terminated.
24
FAST SRAM clear

FAX is installed.)
When print is inhibited

CAN NOT PRINT
After 2sec, FAX control is
terminated.
[Function]
Use to clear the FAST SRAM.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
2) After completion of clearing

CLEARED
CLEAR FAST SRAM

30
TEL/LIU status change

check (Executable only
[Function]
Use to check the TEL/LIU status change.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
HS2 :xxx
RHS :xxx
HS1 :xxx
EXHS:xxx
The display is switched every 2sec.
CHECKING
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
Main
code
66
Sub
code
33
Contents
Signal detection check

FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the signal detection.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
CHECKING
NONE
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following.
CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF
34
Communication time
measurement (Executable
installed.)
[Function]
Use to measurement the communication time.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
COMM. TIME
xx:xx:xx:xxx msec
"xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.
37
Speaker sound volume

setting (Executable only
[Function]
Use to set the speaker sound volume.
1: NO SOUND
2: LOW
3: MID
4: HIGH
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SPEEKER VOL.
PRESS ,
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2
3 4 1.
SELECT (1-4)
1:NO SOUND
SELECT (1-4)
2:LOW
3) [ENTER] key
STORED
xxx
xxx: Set content
.....
Main
code
66
Sub
code
38
Contents
Time setting/check
FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to check the time setting.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT TO SET
1:DATE
2:TIME
2) Select 1
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)
CHANGE?
1:YES 2:NO
2) Select 2
xx:xx
CHANGE?
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No

revision of display)
"xx:xx" is the current value.
3)
3) Select 1
Select 1
INPUT YEAR
(4 DIGITS)____.__.__
INPUT HOUR
(0-24)
__:__
Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
4) Enter the year in 4 digits.
4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits.
INPUT MONTH
(1-12)
1998.__.__
5) Enter the month in 2 digits.
INPUT DAY
(1-31)
1998.01.__
6) Enter the day in 2 digits.
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)
STORED?
1:YES 2:NO
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value.
INPUT MINUTE
(00-59)
01:__
5) Enter minute in 2 digits.

xx:xx
STORED?
1:YES 2:NO
"xx:xx" is the current value.

6) Select 1
STORED
7) Select 1
STORED
5. Trouble codes
A. Trouble codes list
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory notdetected error
02 LSU trouble
10 Shading trouble (Black correction)
11 Shading trouble (White correction)
16 Abnormal laser output
F2
02 Toner supply abnormality
04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error)
F5
02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality
H2
00 Thermistor open
H3
00 Heat roller high temperature detection
H4
00 Heat roller low temperature detection
L1
00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time
after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch
is locked)
L3
00 Scanner return trouble
L4
01 Main motor lock detection
32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
L6
10 Polygon motor lock detection
U2
04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication
error)
11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
40 CRUM chip communication error
B. Details of trouble codes

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory
not-detected error
Detail
The memory is not set properly or the
memory capacity is not set to the duplex
setup (6M).
Check Set TC 26-39 code number to 2.
and
remedy
02 Content LSU trouble
Detail
The BD signal from the LSU cannot be
detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or
always ON)
Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or
disconnection
Polygon motor rotation abnormality
Laser beams are not generated.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Check Check connection of the LSU connector.
and
Execute TC 61-03 to check the LSU
remedy operations.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
normally.
Check that the laser emitting diode
generates laser beams.
Replace the LSU unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction)
Detail
The CCD black scan level is abnormal when
the shading.
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
cable
CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable.
and
Check the CCD unit.
remedy
11 Content Shading trouble (White correction)
Detail
The CCD white scan level is abnormal when
the shading.
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
cable
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference
white plate
Copy lamp lighting abnormality
CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
(When occurred in the RSPF scan position.)
Improper installation of the mirror unit
Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference
and
white plate.
remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of
the copy lamp (TC 5-03).
Check the MCU PWB.
16 Content Abnormal laser output
Detail
When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is
detected.
Cause Laser abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality.
Check Check the laser emitting diode operation.
and
remedy
F2
02 Content Toner supply abnormality
Detail
The maximum toner supply time is greatly
exceeded.
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Improper developing unit
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Replace the developing unit.
remedy
04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life
cycle error)
Detail
The destination of the main unit differs from
that of the CRUM.
When the life cycle information is other than
Not Used (FFh).
Improper developing unit
and
Replace the developing unit.
remedy
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
F5
02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality
Detail
The copy lamp does not turn on.
Cause Copy lamp abnormality
Copy lamp harness abnormality
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check Use TC 5-03 to check the copy lamp
and
operations.
remedy When the copy lamp lights up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the copy lamp does not light up.
between the copy lamp unit and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
H2
00 Content Thermistor open
Detail
The thermistor is open.
The fusing unit is not installed.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection
The fusing unit is not installed.
Check Check the harness and the connector
between the thermistor and the PWB.
and
remedy Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
H3
00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection
Detail
The fusing temperature exceeds 240C.
Fusing section connector disconnection.
Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp
blinking operation.
and
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp keeps ON.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
H4
00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection
Detail
1) When the target temperature (165C) is
not reached in 55 sec after starting
warming-up.
2) When the temperature below 100C is
detected for 300ms under the ready print
state.
"Starting warming-up" means not only that
in power supply but also reset that in reset
from shut-off and in side door close. (The
timing of generating H4 is not limited to
that in power supply.)
Heater lamp abnormality
Thermostat abnormality
Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and
blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp does not light up.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and the thermostat. Check the interlock
switch.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
L1
00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified
time after starting feeding. (The scan head
locking switch is locked)
Detail
Though the mirror base is shifted by about
30mm, the MHPS is not turned OFF.
Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch.
Mirror unit abnormality
The scanner wire is disconnected.
The origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock
switch is released.
and
remedy Use TC 1-01 to check the mirror
reciprocating operations.
When the mirror does not feed.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
When the mirror does feed.
Use TC 1-02 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L3
00 Content Scanner return trouble
Detail
When the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing
after turning on the power, the mirror home
position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
Or when the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (about 6 sec) after start of
copy return, the mirror home position sensor
(MHPS) does not turn ON.
Cause Mirror unit abnormality
Scanner wire disconnection
Origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Use TC 1-01 to check the mirror
and
reciprocating operations.
remedy When the mirror does not return.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
When the mirror does feed.
Use TC 1-02 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
L4
01 Content Main motor lock detection
Detail
When the main motor encoder pulse is not
detected for 1000 msec.
Cause Main motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection the
main motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use TC 25-01 to check the main motor
operations.
and
remedy Check connection of the main motor
harness/connector.
Replace the main motor.
32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
Detail
The error detection is started after 2 sec
from starting rotation of the exhaust fan
motor.
1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is
not detected for 1 sec after starting
detection.
2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan)
detects the HIGH level (unstable) after
detection the lock state (stable state).
Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection
trouble
Exhaust fan motor trouble
MCU PWB trouble
Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection
and
check
remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L6
10 Content Polygon motor lock detection
Detail
The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does
not return within a certain time (about 20
sec) from starting the polygon motor
rotation.
Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection of the
polygon motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use TC 61-01 to check the polygon motor
and
operations.
remedy Check connection of the polygon motor
harness/connector.
Replace the polygon motor.
U2
04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial
communication error)
Detail
EEPROM access process error
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and
Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
Detail
Check sum error of the counter area in the
EEPROM
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and
Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
40 Content CRUM chip communication error
Detail
An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip
communication.
Defective contact of developing unit
MCU PWB trouble
and
Check installation of the developing unit.
remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.)
Section
Developing
Parts
Developer
DV blade
DV side seal (F/R)
DV doctor
Process peripheral
25K
50K
75K
: Clean
100K
: Replace
125K
: Adjust
: Lubricate
Remark
White streaks are made on the

image.
Drum
2. Maintenance display system

Toner
Life
Remaining quantity
LED
Machine
Life
LED
Machine
Developer
8K
EMPTY
NEAR EMPTY
About 12.5%
ON
Operation allowed
Flash
Stop
25K
ON at 25K of the developer count.

Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup.
(If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.)
Default: Not Stop
Maintenance
Clear: SIM 24-06

Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1.
Default: 25K
LED
Clear: SIM 20-1

Not stop.
Machine
Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter.
3. Remaining toner indication

TONER FULL
Display for users
Remaining toner indication

100%
75%
Lo
50%
LOW LEVEL
25%
100-76%
75-51%
50-26%
25-13%
12.5% or less
The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor.
The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor.
The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity.
AR-208S/208D
MAINTENANCE 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM

The user settings consist of the following items.
1. User programs
A. Copy mode
Program
number
Setting codes
Program name
Explanation
(factory default setting

appears in bold)
AUTO CLEAR
1: 10 SEC.
2: 30 SEC.
3: 60 SEC.
4: 90 SEC.
5: 120 SEC.
6: OFF
Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings
if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy
job.
This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also
be disabled.
PREHEAT MODE
1: 30 SEC.
2: 1 MIN.
3: 5 MIN.
4: 30 MIN.
5: 60 MIN.
6: 120 MIN.
7: 240 MIN.
This function automatically switches the machine to a low power

consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine
being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up,
however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation
automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an
original is placed, a print job is received.
AUTO SHUT-OFF
1: ON
2: OFF
Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode.
AUTO SHUT-OFF
TIME
1: 5 MIN.
2: 30 MIN.
3: 60 MIN.
4: 120 MIN.
5: 240 MIN.
This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes

even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses
without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the
power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the
[START] key. Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job
is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power
shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key) can be used.
LAYOUT IN 2IN1
1: PATTERN 1
2: PATTERN 2
Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are
copied onto a single sheet of paper.
OFFSET
FUNCTION
1: ON
2: OFF
When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the
output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode.
ROTATE ORIG.
IMAGE
(AR-208D only)
1: ON
2: OFF
When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on

the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the
top (tablet binding).
10
AE/TEXT
RESOLUTION
1: 300dpi
2: 600dpi
This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT
mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is
slower when high-quality mode is used.
11
2-SIDED COPY
MODE
(AR-208D only)
1: HI-SPEED
2: NORMAL
If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL"

can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in
a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast
two-sided copying.
12
MARGIN WIDTH
1: 1/4"
2: 1/2"
3: 3/4"
4: 1"
Use this setting to set the margin width.
13
MEM. FOR
PRINTER
1: 30%
2: 40%
3: 50%
4: 60%
5: 70%
Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer
mode.
14
AUTO KEY REPEAT
1: ON
2: OFF
Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes
repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to
decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [<] key (v) or [>]
key (^)), this program can be used to have the set value not change when
the key is held down.
15
KEY PRESS TIME
1: NORMAL
2: 0.5 SEC.
3: 1.0 SEC.
4: 1.5 SEC.
5: 2.0 SEC.
Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be
accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being
changed by the accidental pressing of a key.
16
KEY TOUCH
SOUND
1: LOW
2: HIGH
3: OFF
This sets the volume of beep signals.
AR-208S/208D
USER PROGRAM 12 - 1
Program
number
Setting codes
Program name
Explanation

appears in bold)
17
SOUND AT
DEFAULT
1: ON
2: OFF
Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected.
18
TONER SAVE
MODE
1: ON
2: OFF
This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save
mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.
19
AE LEVEL ADJUST
1: SPF/RSPF
(Adjustment to 5 levels
is possible.)
2: DOCUMENT GLASS
(Adjustment to 5 levels
is possible.)
This is used to adjust the exposure level.

The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document
glass and the RSPF.
For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric
values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center.
20
LANGUAGE
1: AMERICAN ENGLISH
2: ENGLISH
3: FRENCH
4: SPANISH
:
:
This is used to set the language used in the display.
21
RESET FACTORY
1: Yes
2: No
This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings.
22
SORT AUTO
SELECT
1: ON
2: OFF
Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode.
24
CHECK RSPF
OPEN
1: ON
2: OFF
You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key is pressed
when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the multi-bypass
paper feed is used.)
25
VALID COPY
WIDTH
1: 8.5x11
2: 5.5x8.5
Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When
"5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up
to invoice size.
28
LSU SETTING
1: ON
2: OFF
Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating,
or also when the polygon motor is stopped.
29
PAPER TYPE
1: PLAIN PAPER
2: HEAVY PAPER
Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used.
Normally "PLAIN PAPER" should be selected.
30
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
1: LIGHTER
2: LIGHT
3: NORMAL
4: DARK
5: DARKER
Set the contrast of the display.
B. Print mode
Program
number
Setting codes
Program name
Explanation

appears in bold)
FORCED OUTPUT
1: ON
2: OFF
When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically

continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out
in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode.
USB 2.0 MODE

SWITCH *1
1: FULL-SPEED
2: HI-SPEED
This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when
using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the
system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this
program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting
should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver.
AUTO TRAY
SWITCH*2
1: ON
2: OFF
If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in
another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the
bypass tray). The function can be disabled.
*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.
*2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
AR-208S/208D
USER PROGRAM 12 - 2
2. Selecting a setting for a user program
Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base

setting beep)
1)
The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key

entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid
key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base
setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base
setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting
beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting
beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH
SOUND".
Press the [MENU] key and then press the [ENTER] key.
In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply
pressing the [MENU] key.
MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM
The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:

2)
Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to select the item that you
wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then
press the [ENTER] key.
See "1. User programs" for the program name and program
code.
You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys.
Key entry beep: One beep

Base setting beep: Three beeps
Base settings
The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy
setting. The base settings are as follows:
Copy ratio: 100%
Light and Dark level: Center
USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE
3)
Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to change the setting of the
selected item.
See "1. User programs" for the program code.
PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN
NOTE:
If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key
[C] and repeat the procedure from step 2).
To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.
4)
Press the [ENTER] key.

Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen
appears.
NOTE:
When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and
the [ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment
screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [ENTER] key.
AR-208S/208D
Invalid key beep: Two beeps
USER PROGRAM 12 - 3
Paper feed location:

Tray 1 (Upper paper tray)
AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO
SRAM
256kbit
FlashROM
1Mbit
AR-208S/208D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1
Fan Motor
Shifter Motor
Duplex Motor
A5V
18.3856MHz
Printer CLK
A
G
C
Main Motor
Sensor/SW
PPD3,
PD2, CED2
Mechanical load
CPFS2
Driver
24V 12V
Driver
Driver
SSCG
Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz)
2nd Cassette
Duplex Model Only
FPGA
CPU
uPD703100
Ether Chip
RTL8019AS
1284 I/F
C
D
S
/MMD
NIC PCBA
(AL Model only)
Reg
AFE(HT86V26)
12V
M
P
X
/MMLD
RJ45
(N/W
connector)
MCU-PWB
CCD Driver
R
G
B
MMCLK
5V
12V
Mirror Motor
Driver
LSU
LASER
D[150]
A[191]
Reset IC
3.3V
Polygon
Motor
OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
EEPROM
I2C Bus
8Kbyte
UART
/ESPRD
Driver
RSPF/SPF Motor
POWER SUPPLY
AC Code
TC, GRID, MC, BIAS
HVU
D[7..0]
RD
CS
INT
PSW
KEYSCAN1 - 3
SELIN1,2,3
KEYIN
PSL
SDRAM
256Mbx2
LCD E
LCD RS
LCD R/W (TBD)
LCD DB7-4
EEPROM
(AR Model Only)
(CRUM)
CPU CLK (19.6608MHz)
SSCG
/POFF,HL,PR
FW
3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V
D[158]
CPUCLK
MHPS
CPU
H8S/2321
(19.6608MHz)
System Reset
Image BUS(PI-Bus)
Image BUS(PO-Bus)
SDRAM
8Mbyte
HOME
POSITION
SENSOR
SRAM
1Mbit
Flash ROM 16Mbit
8
8
IO ASIC
DC-DC
0 - 24V
Lamp Inverter
for CCFL
CCFL x 2
PWM
8bits (MSB/LSB)
KRONOS ASIC
(296pin)
Toner Motor
Driver
3.3V
AD
16bits
3.3V
PMRDY
PMD
CCD
(ILX558K)
PMCLK
Carriage Unit
8Mb
or 16Mb
OA982
P-Bus
8bit
LCD
(2 x 20)
START KEY
Buzzer
KEY Matrix
LED
18.3856MHz
Speaker
AR-FX13
ISP1583
12MHz
LED Driver
HC238
(3 to 8 decode) 8bit
HC151
PSL LED
OPE PWB
Flash ROM
FAX I/F
FAX Main PCBA
FAX Model Only
NW PWB
Network Box
100Base-T
AR-NB2A
(AR Option)
AR-FX13
CPU I/O
LED
SPID
SRJD
SCOD
Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
Drum Initial detector
PPD1
POD
MFD
PPD2
CPU INTERRUPT
SPPD
Sensor/SW
(Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)
KEY Matrix
FAX OPE PWB
FAX Model Only
Ethernet
(RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC
MPFS,RRS,CPFS1
Mechanical Load
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram
A. Overall block diagram
USB2.0
High-speed
2. Signal name list

Signal name
(ADCLK)
(AFE_DB0)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
(AFE_DB7)
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_SDI)
(AFE_SEN)
(BSAMP)
(VSAMP)
/BIAS
/CPFS1
/CPFS2
/DMT_0
/DMT_1
/DMT_2
/DMT_3
/FAX_RST
/GRIDL
/LDEN
/MC
/MDM_IRQ
/MMCLK
/MMD
/MPFS
/PMD
/POFF
/PR
/RD
/RRS
/RSV_SOL
/SFTMT0
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT3
/SPUS
/SRVC
/SYNC
/TC
/VFMCNT
/VIDEO
BZR
CCD-CP
CCD-RS
CCD-TG
CCD_PHI1
CCD_PHI2
CED1
CED2
DVSEL
FANLK
FW
HLOUT
KEYIN
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
LCDCON
LCDDB4
Name
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
HV bias signal
1st CS pickup solenoid
2nd CS pickup solenoid
DUP motor
DUP motor
DUP motor
DUP motor
FAX PWB reset signal
HV grid signal
Laser
HV MC signal
FAX PWB interrupt
Main motor
Main motor
Multi bypass solenoid
Polygon motor
Low voltage power
Heater lamp
Control signal
1st transport solenoid
Reverse solenoid
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Paper feed solenoid
Reverse clutch
Laser
HV TC signal
Fan speed signal
Laser
Buzzer signal
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
Machine cassette detection
2nd CS cassette detection
Developing tank detection
Fusing fan
Low voltage power
Heater lamp
Key scan input
Key scan output
Key scan output
Key scan output
LCD control signal
LCD data signal
Function/Operation
AFE control signal
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
AFE control signal
AFE serial data
AFE control signal
AFE control signal
AFE control signal
HV bias drive
DUP motor phase control

Main charger grid control
Laser circuit control signal
Main charger control
Clock signal to the polygon motor
Polygon motor drive signal
Polygon motor drive signal
Output power control
Power relay control
MCU bus control signal
Shifter motor phase control

Horizontal sync signal from the LSU

Transfer charger grid control
Fan rotation speed control
Laser drive signal
Buzzer
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
Fan lock detection signal

Zero cross detection
Heater lamp control
Key detection control
Key scan output
Key scan output
Key scan output
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Section
Scanner unit section
Process section
2nd cassette section
Duplex drive section
FAX optional section
Process section
LSU
Process section
Main drive section
Main drive section
LSU
Power section
Power section
RSPF section
Shifter motor section
RSPF section
RSPF section
LSU
Process section
Optical section
LSU
Operation section
Developing section
Optical section
Power section
Power section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Signal name
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
LEDPOD
LEDPPD1
LEDPPD2
LEDSCOD
LEDSPID
LEDSPPD
LEDSRJD
MCU_D0
MCU_D1
MCU_D2
MCU_D3
MCU_D4
MCU_D5
MCU_D6
MCU_D7
MCU_INT
MCU_NCS
MHPS
MMLD
MODEM_IN
OP-DATA
OP-LATCH
OP_CLK
OUTA+
OUTAOUTB+
OUTBPB_ADDR0
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7
PB_NAE0
PB_NCS1
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
PD1
PD2
PMCLK_A
PMRDY
POD
PPD1
PPD2
PPD3
PSL
PSW
RTH_IN
SCOD
Name
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD control signal
LCD control signal
POD sensor power
PPD sensor power
PPD2 sensor power
SCOD sensor power
SPID sensor power
SPPD sensor power
SRJD sensor power
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
MCU interrupt
Control signal
MHPS sensor
Main motor
FAX connection detection signal
LED driver control
LED driver control
LED driver control
Scanner motor
Scanner motor
Scanner motor
Scanner motor
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Control signal
Control signal
Control signal
Control signal
PD SW sensor
PD2 SW sensor
Polygon motor
Polygon motor
POD sensor
PPD sensor
PPD2 sensor
PPD3 sensor
Power save LED
Start button control
Thermistor
SCOD sensor
Function/Operation
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD

Carriage HP detection
Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
Scanner motor phase control

Peripheral bus control signal
1st CS paper width sensor
2nd CS paper width detection
Clock signal to the polygon motor
Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
2nd CS paper transport detection
Fusing section thermistor temperature detection

RSPF cover open sensor
Section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Paper exit section
Fusing section
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
Optical section
Main drive section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Optical drive section
LSU
LSU
Paper exit section
Fusing section
Operation section
Operation section
Fusing section
RSPF section
Signal name
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
SHOLD
SPID
SPMT_0
SPMT_1
SPMT_2
SPMT_3
SPPD
SRJD
TCS
TMA_O
TMB_O
USB +D
USB -D
VCL
VFMOUT
Name
Select signal
Select signal
Select signal
Laser
SPID sensor
RSPF motor
RSPF motor
RSPF motor
RSPF motor
SPPD sensor
SRJD sensor
Toner sensor
Toner motor
Toner motor
USB signal
USB signal
Copy lamp
Fusing fan
Function/Operation
HC151 select signal
HC151 select signal
HC151 select signal
Laser APC signal
RSPF UN paper entry sensor
RSPF motor phase control
RSPF transport detection
RSPF paper exit sensor
Toner quantity detection
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control
Copy lamp control

Fan drive signal
Section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
LSU
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
RSPF section
Developing section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
USB section
USB section
Optical section
CPU3.3
LCDCONT
(8)
(9)
TP109
(3)
(2)
(4)
(4)
C11
NM
TP724
33P
R25
C7
33P
C8
33P
5
6
7
8
C9
C19
10U/10V<2012>
L1
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB1
0J <1608>
SPFMT3
SPFMT2
SPFMT1
SPFMT0
/RES_USB20
/SCANSP
/SCANST
/TRANSST
/ES_PAGE
PROTECT
/RES_OA982
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_GASIC
(PSFANLK)
/ES_PAGE
/CSIOASIC
/CSGASIC
/CSSRAM
/CSFROM
(2)
/SCANSP
(2)
/SCANST
(2)
/TRANSST
(6)
PMCLK
(5)
SPFMT3
(5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(5)
SPFMT1
(5)
SPFMT0
(10) /RES_USB20
33J
0.1U
C20
(6)
R51
RTH
(TCS_AN)
0.1U
C21
(2,5) VIDEO#
(6)
(6)
/RES_OA982
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_GASIC
0.1U
C22
(9)
(3)
(2)
0.1U
C23
NM
0J
NM
0.1U
C2
VCC3
33JX4
BR20
33J
(9)
(9)
(9)
(4)
TP2
4
3
2
1
/CS3#
/CS2#
/CS1#
/CS0#
ES_STS
ES_CMD
/ES_SRDY
RY/BY
TP729
TP734
TP735
R7
R6
TP4
R2
NM
TP3
R1
7
6
4
3
VCC3
TP79
TP80
TP74
TP76
TP78
TP62
TP64
TP66
TP68
TP70
TP56
TP40
TP42
TP44
TP46
TP48
TP49
TP51
TP53
ES_STS
ES_CMD
/ES_SRDY
RY/BY
R16
R17
R18
R13
R14
R15
XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
IC2
33J
33J
33J
TP6
TP5
TP1
1
8
5
2
R20
/PRINTST
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#
R3
0J
15PF
C1
15PF
330J
C5
AVcc
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
AVss
Vss
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0
MD0
MD1
MD2
PG0/CAS
PG1/CS3
PG2/CS2
33J
33J
100J
CY25811SC
VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1
IC1
TP8
TP9
(2)
/PRINTST
(2,3,4,5)
/RD
(3,4)
/HWR
(2)
/LWR
0.1U
C24
TP81
TP82
TP83
TP84
BR21
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
A0
A1
A2
A3
0.1U
C25
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
R384
R12
R8
X1
AT-49
19.6608MHz
R4
33J
22J
NM
NM
12P
C6
CPUCLK#
/RESET1
EXTAL
XTAL
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)
BR24
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
C12
22P
CPUCLK
TP19
C70
NM
/STBY
NMI
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
C14
NM
EXTAL
XTAL
TP20
TP21
TP85
TP86
TP87
TP88
TP89
TP90
TP91
TP92
BR22
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
TP93
TP94
TP95
TP96
TP97
TP98
TP99
TP100
BR23
8
7 33JX4
6
5
BR25
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
MCU PWB (CPU section)
TP105
TP106
A20
C13
NM
/WDTOVF
TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP34
TP35
TP36
TP101
TP102
TP103
33J
R50
AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 1
C15
NM
TP37
P60
A[20..0]
H8S/2321
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
/CS5#
P35/SCK1
P34/SCK0
P33/RxD1
P32/RxD0
P31/TxD1
P30/TxD0
VCC
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
Vss
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
Vss
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VCC
(3)
(5)
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
P53/ADTRG
P52/SCK2
Vss
Vss
P51/RxD2
P50/TxD2
PF0/BREQ
PF1/BACK
PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
PF7/0
Vss
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3
P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5
P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1
P61/TEND0/CS5
Vss
Vss
P60/DREQ0/CS4
Vss
PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0
Vss
NC
VCC
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
Vss
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9
PB2/A10
PB3/A11
Vss
PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
Vss
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
Vss
Vss
P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
TP107
TP108
(2,3,4)
TP72
TP73
TP75
TP77
TP57
TP59
TP61
TP63
TP65
TP67
TP69
TP71
TP50
TP52
TP54
TP55
TP47
TP41
TP43
TP38
CPU3.3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)
/RES_NIC
33J
33J
1KJ
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
R78
R364
R22
DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
BR18
8
7 33JX4
6
5
(2)
(5,9)
(2)
(5)
(2,5)
(8)
(8)
8 BR19
7 33JX4
6
5
8 BR17
7 33JX4
6
5
DMT0
(7)
DMT1
(7)
DMT2
(7)
DMT3
(7)
MMCLK
(6)
RESETOUT1 (5)
/RES_NIC (15)
BZR
(11)
CRUMSCL
(16)
CRUMSDA (16)
/CS5
(13)
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
mt_at_home#
CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)
8 BR16
7 33JX4
6
5
C369
NM
C10
NM
D3
D2
D1
D0
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D15
D14
D13
D12
RSV_IN0
SCL
RxD
SDA
TXD
POFF
D[15..0]
SCL
RxD
SDA
TxD
POFF
100P
100P
TP7
C4
C3
(2,3,4,13)
(4)
(12)
(4)
(12)
(6)
SPFMT0
SPFMT1
SPFMT2
SPFMT3
DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
/CS5#
10KJX4
BR12
10KJX4
BR11
/RES_FAX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
8
7
6
5
R95
R132
R131
R94
R66
R26
/RES_NIC
/RES_FAX
D3
D2
D1
D0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D11
D10
D9
D8
D15
D14
D13
D12
/RES_OA982
/RES_GASIC
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_USB20
/RES_FAX (13)
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
10KJ
10KJX4
BR6
R392
1
2
3
4
R11
/ES_SRDY
ES_CMD
ES_STS
R5
R9
10KJX4
BR1
P60
1
2
3
4
/PRINTST
/ES_PAGE
/STBY
NMI
/WDTOVF
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
NM_10KJX4
BR9
NM_10KJX4
BR7
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
10KJ
10KJ
10KJX4
10KJX4
BR10
R24
R53
R52
10KJX4
BR13
CRUMSDA
1
2
3
4
R21
R23
R19
4
3
2
1
R67
1
2
3
4
RxD
TxD
/SCANSP
/TRANSST
/SCANST
RY/BY
SDA
SCL
POFF
CPUCLK
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#
CCD_TG
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
BR3
BR5
1
2
3
4
BR4
/CS0#
/CS1#
/CS2#
/CS3#
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
8
7
6
5
2KJ
2KJ
10KJ
5
6
7
8
10KJ
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
1/16
10KJX4
BR2
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
VCC3
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. MCU PWB
VCC3
(4)
CCD_CP
AFE_SEN
ADCLK
AFE_SCK
(5)
(5)
(5)
10KJX4
8 RAMDB11
7 RAMDB10
6 RAMDB9
5 RAMDB8
BR53
1
2
3
4
PFCLKIN
PFCLKOUT
TP720
R68
R70
10KJX4
8 RAMDB15
7 RAMDB14
6 RAMDB13
5 RAMDB12
BR49
1
2
3
4
TP719
10KJX4
8 RAMDB3
7 RAMDB2
6 RAMDB1
5 RAMDB0
BR45
1
2
3
4
SDCLK
10KJX4
8 RAMDB7
7 RAMDB6
6 RAMDB5
5 RAMDB4
RAMDB[15..0]
MAD[12..0]
0J
0J
C74
NM
R59
33J
NM
10KJ
10KJ
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
C351
BR34
1
2
3
4
R45
R46
VCC3
AFE_SDI
AFE_DB7
8
AFE_DB6
7
AFE_DB5
6
AFE_DB4
5
10KJX4
AFE_DB3
8
AFE_DB2
7
AFE_DB1
6
AFE_DB0
5
10KJX4
10KJ AFE_SDI
BR41
1
2
3
4
(4)
(4)
1
2
3
4
BR31
1
2
3
4
BR33
R42
VCC3
(14) AFE_DB[7..0]
CCD_PHI2
CCD_PHI1
(5)
(5)
AFE_SDI
BSAMP
(5)
(5)
CCD_RS
(5)
(5)
TP862
TP863
TP864
TP865
TP866
TP867
TP868
TP869
RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12
RAMDB11
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB8
TP826
TP827
TP828
TP829
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4
C108
12P
C107
10P
X5
AT-49(18.3856MHz)
TP822
TP823
TP824
TP825
MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
DQM1
SDCKE
TP858
TP859
TP860
TP861
RAMDB3
RAMDB2
RAMDB1
RAMDB0
(4)
(4)
TP854
TP855
TP856
TP857
/SDRAS
/SDCAS
/SDWDE
DQM0
(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)
RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4
BANK1
BANK0
/SDCS
(4)
(4)
(4)
TP821
MAD10
1
2
3
4
BR36
1
2
3
4
BR37
1
2
3
4
BR38
(1,3,4,13) D[15..0]
1
2
3
4
BR39
1
2
3
4
BR42
1
2
3
4
BR44
1
2
3
4
BR48
1
2
3
4
BR51
1
2
3
4
BR54
1
2
3
4
BR56
RAM_CLK_OUT
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
(7)
(7)
(7)
TP817
TP818
TP819
TP820
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
(7)
(7)
(7)
(6)
(6)
(6)
MAD3
MAD2
MAD1
MAD0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_AI0
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
33JX4
33JX4
82JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
C80
47P
SYNC#
TP746
TP238
TP239
TP241
TP233
TP235
TP228
TP229
TP231
TP225
TP220
TP222
TP209
TP211
TP213
TP214
TP216
TP218
TP205
TP206
TP196
TP198
TP200
TP202
TP188
TP190
TP192
TP193
TP184
TP186
TP174
TP176
TP178
TP180
TP181
TP167
TP169
TP171
TP163
TP165
TP147
TP149
TP151
TP152
TP154
TP156
TP158
TP160
TP142
TP143
TP145
10J
R69
8 33JX4
7
6
5
8 33JX4
7
6
5
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
(1,3,4)
(5)
MIRCNT
CPU_SYNC
ARB_INT
(/SYNC)
(5)
(1)
(1)
GND(CORE)
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
VCC(CORE)
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
GND(AC)
RAM_MAD3
RAM_MAD2
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD1
RAM_MAD0
RAM_MAD10
VCC(CORE)
RAM_BANKS1
RAM_BANKS0
RAM_CS
RAM_RAS
RAM_CAS
VCC(AC)
RAM_WDE
RAM_DQM0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA7
RAM_DATA6
RAM_DATA5
RAM_DATA4
GND(CORE)
RAM_DATA3
RAM_DATA2
RAM_DATA1
RAM_DATA0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA15
RAM_DATA14
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DATA13
RAM_DATA12
RAM_DATA11
RAM_DATA10
RAM_DATA9
RAM_DATA8
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DQM1
RAM_CKE
GND(AC)
RAM_CLK_OUT
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD12
RAM_MAD11
RAM_MAD9
VCC(CORE)
RAM_MAD8
RAM_MAD7
VCC(AC)
RAM_MAD6
RAM_MAD5
RAM_MAD4
GND(AC)
CPUDATA15
CPUDATA14
CPUDATA13
CPUDATA12
CPUDATA11
CPUDATA10
CPUDATA9
CPUDATA8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TP747
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
IC4
BR32
R41
TP877
TP844
TP843
TP842
TP841
R39
TP876
47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM
CL
TP848
TP847
TP846
TP845
R38
TP836
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB0
R37
C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68
(14)
AFE_DB7
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4
BR30
R36
TP873
R34
TP874
TP875
R33
TP835
R35
R32
TP834
R31
TP878
/RESET0
(4,5,9,12)
10KJ
R40
10KJX4
5
6
7
8
BR27
4
3
2
1
JTG_TCK
JTG_TMS
JTG_TDI
JTG_TDO
/OUTCS
10KJX4
5
6
7
8
BR26
4
3
2
1
/PCLPRO
/FAXPRO
/OUTACK
/INREQ
VCC3
TP495
TP493
TP490
TP879
TP110
D7
D6
D5
D4
HG73C141HFV(LF)
ASIC
A[20..0]
(1)
/RES_GASIC
(3,5) (/ASIC_RST)
(1)
/CSGASIC
(1)
/LWR
(1,3,4,5) /RD
R134
R133
TP881
TP872
TP727
NM
33J
(1,5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
1000P
C97
VIDEO#
/LEND
MMD
PMD
TC
GRIDL
TP486
TP471
TP468
(6)
MC
(6)
BIAS
(6) VFMCNT_12V
(6) VFM_24V
(9) /FPOFF
TP130
TP131
TP132
TP133
TP255
TP259
TP260
TP261
RSV_OUT0
RSV_OUT1
RSV_OUT2
TP882
8
7
6
5
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
TP144
TP146
TP248
TP249
TP250
TP240
TP242
TP243
TP244
TP245
TP246
TP247
TP232
TP234
TP236
TP237
TP230
TP221
TP223
TP224
TP226
TP227
FWREN
(5)
R73
NM
R75
NM
R79
0J
(9)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
(9)
(9)
(9)
(9)
(9)
/PIWR
/PIACK
/POACK
/PIREQ
(9)
/POREQ
PIDATA[7..0]
G3.3V
C411
0.1U
TP257
TP254
S0
S1
7
6
4
3
N.C.
GND
XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS
CY25814SC
VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1
1
8
5
2
SFCLK48B
SFCLK48A
TP891
TP885
R49
R48
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
BR60
1
2
3
4
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB
TP258
TP253
R65 33J
C375
X7
AT-49(12MHz)
C402
12P
12P
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
BR59
1
2
3
4
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
TP892
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
BR58
1
2
3
4
VCC3
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
10KJX4
8
7
6
5
BR55
1
2
3
4
BR52
1
2
3
4
VCC3
BR57
1
2
3
4
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
(1)
(1)
(1)
/PRINTST
/SCANST
R356
R357
R358
R359
(9)
/TRANSST
(9)
/SC_LINE
/PR_LINE
C401
10U/10V<2012>
C400
10U/10V<2012>
MEM_INT
CLKSW
/POREQ
/PIREQ
10J
10J
C399
10U/10V<2012>
C37
10U/10V<2012>
VCC3
2/16
L2
ZJSR5101-223TA
FB2
NM_0J <1608>
R63 NM_33J
SFCLK48
SFCLK48B
C77
NM_12P
SFCLK48A
R62
10KJ
TP743
(15)
(9)
R58
NM
VCC3
OUTPUT
PFCLK
VCC
10KJ
R47
PARAD[7..0]
VCC3
PODATA[7..0]
NM_SG8002DC(48MHz)
IC9
TP252
X2
R61
10KJ
R60
NM
TP251 8
R57
NM
C76
0.1U
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
VCC3
/INIT_I
/SLCTIN_I
/AUTOFD_I
/STB_I
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
R56
10KJ
VCC3
8
7
6
5
BR46 33JX4
PARAD0
8
PARAD1
7
PARAD2
6
PARAD3
5
8BR40 33JX4 PARAD4
PARAD5
7
PARAD6
6
PARAD7
5
BR43 33JX4
33J
/REV_O
8
/FAULT_O
7
/ACK_O
6
BUSY_O
5
PE_O
BR47 33JX4
33J
SLCT_O
VCC3
R314
0J
FB3
0J <1608>
(6)
(6)
(6)
(9)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(6)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(1)
R92
NM
S1
TP256
VCC3
VCC3
HL
PR
CPFS2
/IMC_READY
KEYSC3
KEYSC2
KEYSC1
SPFON
MIRON
MPFS
OP_LATCH
OP_DATA
TM
TM_
OP_CLK
/SCANSP
1
2
3
4
R55
SLCT
TP215
TP217
TP219
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB
R54
1
2
3
4
/REV
/FAULT
/ACK
BUSY
PE
TP207
TP208
TP210
TP212
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
8
7
6
5
BR35 33JX4
33J
/H_SYNC
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
PIDATA3
TP194
TP195
TP197
TP199
TP201
TP203
TP204
TP187
TP189
TP191
TP182
TP183
TP185
TP168
TP170
TP172
TP173
TP175
TP177
TP179
TP153
TP155
TP157
TP159
TP161
TP162
TP164
TP166
TP148
TP150
R44
1
2
3
4
TP141
G3.3V
CPFS1
(6)
MRPS3
(6)
MRPS2
(6)
MRPS1
(6)
LDEN
(6)
RRS
(6)
PTPULSE (6)
GASIC_READY (12)
/POREQ
VCC(AC)
/PIWT
/PIACK
GND(AC)
/POACK
/PIREQ
GND(CORE)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
VCC(CORE)
/TRANSST
/RECEPTST
/PRINTST
/SCANST
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
GND(CORE)
VPOUT
VMOUT
OEN
GND(AC)
SUSPEND
IE1284_PARAD0
IE1284_PARAD1
VCC(AC)
IE1284_PARAD2
IE1284_PARAD3
IE1284_PARAD4
IE1284_PARAD5
IE1284_PARAD6
IE1284_PARAD7
IE1284_REV
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_FAULT
IE1284_ACK
IE1284_BUSY
IE1284_PE
GND(CORE)
IE1284_SLCT
IE1284_INIT
IE1284_SLCTIN
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_AUTOFD
IE1284_STB
TSP_MODE
TSO0
/SCANSP
VCC(AC)
OPE_CLK
GND(AC)
OPE_LATCH
OPE_DATA
TM
/TM
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14B
OUTP13B
OUTP12B
OUTP11B
OUTP10B
OUTP09B
OUTP08B
GND(CORE)
OUTP07B
OUTP06B
OUTP05B
BR29 33JX4
1
2
3
4
BR28 33JX4
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
12P
C291
CCD_TG
TP111
TP112
TP113
TP114
TP115
TP116
TP117
TP118
D3
D2
D1
D0
12P
C292
VSAMP
TP120
TP119
MEM_INT
12P
C293
(1,5)
TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124
TP125
TP126
TP127
TP128
TP129
A9
A8
A7
A6
12P
C294
(5)
JTG_TDO
JTG_TDI
TP742
TP741
RAM_CLK_OUT
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
12P
C295
33J
JTG_TMS
JTG_TCK
TP740
TP739
SFCLK48
12P
C296
R30
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRO
/PCLPRO
TP738
TP737
TP736
TP325
TP270
PFCLK
CLKSW
12P
C297
TP837
TP630
TP628
TP627
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
0.1U
C48
TP507
TP500
TP498
SYNC#
12P
C298
0.1U
C28
0.1U
0.1U
C27
0.1U
0.1U
C49
C38
0.1U
0.1U
C50
C39
0.1U
C29
0.1U
0.1U
C30
0.1U
0.1U
C51
C40
0.1U
0.1U
C52
C41
C31
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C53
C42
0.1U
C32
0.1U
0.1U
C43
C33
0.1U
0.1U
C35
0.1U
0.1U
C36
0.1U
C54
C44
C34
0.1U
C45
0.1U
C55
C46
0.1U
C56
C47
0.1U
C57
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
TP134
TP135
TP136
TP137
TP138
TP139
TP364
TP351
TP140
TP462
TP403
TP402
TP382
222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
CLPWM
VCC(AC)
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
GND(AC)
AFESCK
VCC(CORE)
ADCLK
GND(CORE)
AFE_SEN
CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2
AFE_SDI
CCD_CP
BSAMP
CCD_RS
CCD_TG
VSAMP
GND(CORE)
TD0
TDI
TRSK
TMS
TCK
VCC(CORE)
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRD
/PCLPRD
GND(AC)
MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13
VCC(CORE)
MDAT12
MDAT11
MDAT10
VCC(AC)
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
GND(CORE)
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04
VCC(CORE)
MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00
GND(AC)
/INCS
/INACK
/OUTREQ
GND(CORE)
/HSYNC
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
VCC(AC)
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
/POCS
CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4
VCC(AC)
CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0
GND(AC)
MIRCNT
/CPUSYNC
MEM_INT
ARB_INT
VCC(CORE)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5
GND(CORE)
RAM_CLK_IN
CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0
/CPUCS
SFCLK48
GND(CORE)
/CPUWR
/CPURD
/RESET
VCC(CORE)
PFCLK
CLKSW
GND(CORE)
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
TM2_15M
/SYNC
GND(AC)
/VIDEO
/LEND
VCC(AC)
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP07A
OUTP08A
GND(CORE)
OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14A
OUTP00B
GND(AC)
OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
VCC(AC)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
0.1U
C69
MCU PWB (ASIC section)
C75
22000P
(2,5) (/ASIC_RST)
(1) /RES_IOASIC
R135
33J
R136
NM
1000P
C98
A[20..0]
(1,2,4,13) D[15..0]
(1,2,4)
MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section)
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
(1)
D13
D12
D11
D15
D14
CPUCLK#
/RD
/HWR
/CSIOASIC
(1,2,4,5)
(1,4)
(1)
(11)
KEYIN
R706
NM_10KJ
IC52
TP635
TP294
TP296
TP285
TP287
TP282
IOIC3.3V
(11)
(11)
(11)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
VDD
PHICLK
gnd
XCE0(PU50K)
CE1(PU50K)
XOE(PU50K)
XWR(PU50K)
A4(PU50K)
A3(PU50K)
A2(PU50K)
A1(PU50K)
A0(PU50K)
XRST(Sch)
vdd
D7(PU50K)
D6(PU50K)
SMC(SCAN)(PD50K)
SIN(SCAN)(PD50K)
SOUT(SCAN)
AMC(SCAN)(PD50K)
SCK(SCAN)
D5(PU50K)
D4(PU50K)
D3(PU50K)
VDD
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
TP262
TP263
TP264
TP265
TP266
TP267
TP268
TP269
TP636
SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100>
VDD
PORTE0(PD50K)
PORTE1(PD50K)
PORTE2(PD50K)
PORTE3(PD50K)
PORTE4(PD50K)
PORTE5(PD50K)
PORTE6(PD50K)
PORTE7(PD50K)
gnd
PORTD0(PD50K)
PORTD1(PD50K)
PORTD2(PD50K)
PORTD3(PD50K)
PORTD4(PD50K)
PORTD5(PD50K)
PORTD6(PD50K)
PORTD7(PD50K)
gnd
PORTC0(PD50K)
PORTC1(PD50K)
PORTC2(PD50K)
PORTC3(PD50K)
PORTC4(PD50K)
VDD
75
74 TP283
73 TP284
72 TP286
71 TP288
70 TP289
69 TP290
68 TP291
67 TP292
66
65 TP293
64 TP295
63
62 TP297
61 TP298
60 TP299
59 TP300
58 TP301
57
56 TP832
55 TP302
54 TP303
53 TP304
52 TP305
51
RSV_IN1
TP811
RSV_OUT17
RSV_OUT16
RSV_OUT15
RSV_OUT14
RSV_OUT13
RSV_OUT12
RSV_OUT11
RSV_OUT10
RSV_OUT9
RSV_OUT8
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(PPD3)
(POD)
(SPID)
(CED1)
(CED2)
(DRST)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(13)
DSWS
(TCS)
DVS1
(PD1)
(PD2)
(SCOD)
(SRJD)
(MFD)
MSU_ST1
(11)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(6)
(PMRDY)
(MMLD)
(FANLK)
THOPEN
BL
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(6)
(RSV_SOL)
PSFM
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
/ES_CRDY
MCNT
(11)
(11)
(7)
(7)
INFOLED
PSL
SPUS
SRVC
SFTMT0
SFTMT1
SFTMT2
SFTMT3
IO ASIC
RSV_IN2
IOIC3.3V
LCDE
LCDRS
R707
4.7KJ
VCC3
/ES_CRDY
0.1U
C568
0.1U
C662
2
1
MSU_ST1
R10
4.7KJ
VCC3
0.1U
C575
TP271
TP272
TP273
TP274
D10
D9
D8
0.1U
C660
TP275
TP276
TP277
TP278
TP279
TP306
TP280
TP281
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
TP307
TP308
TP309
TP815
TP310
TP311
TP312
TP313
0.1U
C574
NM_10KJ
GND
YIN(PD50K)(5VFS)
SELC(OD,5VFS)
SELB(OD,5VFS)
SELA(OD,5VFS)
gnd
XCE_EXT
PORTG0(PD50K)
PORTG1(PD50K)
PORTG2(PD50K)
PORTG3(PD50K)
PORTG4(PD50K)
PORTG5(PD50K)
PORTG6(PD50K)
PORTG7(PD50K)
vdd
PORTF0(PD50K)
PORTF1(PD50K)
PORTF2(PD50K)
PORTF3(PD50K)
PORTF4(PD50K)
PORTF5(PD50K)
PORTF6(PD50K)
PORTF7(PD50K)
GND
0.1U
C569
R122
GND
D2(PU50K)
D1(PU50K)
D0(PU50K)
PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS)
vdd
PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTC7(PD50K)
PORTC6(PD50K)
PORTC5(PD50K)
GND
0.1U
C663
NM_10KJ
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
TP314
TP315
TP316
TP317
TP318
TP319
TP320
TP321
TP322
TP323
TP324
0.1U
C700
R263
C304
10U/10V<2012>
L15
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB13
0J <1608>
VCC3
3/16
R76
(1)
/CSSRAM
(1,2,3,5)
/RD
(1,3)
/HWR
A[20..0]
(1,2,3,13) D[15..0]
(1,2,3)
(1) SCL
(1) SDA
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
TP726
100J
NM
C352
5
28
12
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32
GND
GND
VDD
VDD
9
25
8
24
6
7
10
11
22
23
26
27
VCC3
I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7
C82
0.1U
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR
CS1
OE
WE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
IC8
VCC3
8
7
6
5
E0
E1
E2
VSS
0.1U
C84
1
2
3
4
0.1U
C85
VCC3 VCC3
CAT24WC08LI
VCC
WC
SCL
SDA
IC5
Serial EE-PROM
MCU PWB (Memory section)
NM
C353
VCC3
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
R77
NM
TP889
R74
10KJ
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A20
A17
A1
A19
A18
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
(1,3)
/HWR
(2,5,9,12) /RESET0
(9)
VPP
(1)
R86
RY/BY
NM
TP353
TP355
TP357
TP359
TP361
TP363
TP365
TP366
TP368
TP344
TP346
TP347
TP326
TP328
TP330
TP331
TP333
TP335
TP337
TP339
TP341
VCC3
10KJ
NM
TP349
TP888
NM
R88
R81
NM
R82
NM
C86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
(9)
A16
BYTE
GND
DQ15
DQ7
DQ14
DQ6
DQ13
DQ5
DQ12
DQ4
VCC
DQ11
DQ3
DQ10
DQ2
DQ9
DQ1
DQ8
DQ0
OE
GND
CE
A0
S29AL016D70TFI020
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A19
NC
WE
RP
VPP
WP
RY/BY
A18
A17
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
IC7
VPP
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
R84
10KJ
VCC3
TP367
TP369
TP348
TP350
TP352
TP354
TP356
TP358
TP360
TP362
TP332
TP334
TP336
TP338
TP340
TP342
TP343
TP345
TP327
TP329
C88
0.1U
VCC3
FlashROM VPP Controll
A17
NM
C354
R83
22000P
C87
NM
R80
NM
C355
J1,J2
A1
/RD
1
2
3
(1,2,3,5)
/CSFROM
D11
D3
D10
D2
D9
D1
D8
D0
D15
D7
D14
D6
D13
D5
D12
D4
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
MAD10
MAD0
MAD1
MAD2
MAD3
RAMDB7
RAMDB5
RAMDB6
RAMDB3
RAMDB4
RAMDB1
RAMDB2
RAMDB0
DQM0
/SDWDE
/SDCAS
/SDRAS
/SDCS
BANK0
BANK1
C89
0.1U
VCC3
TP850
TP849
TP813
TP840
TP838
TP853
TP839
VCC3
VSS
DQ15
VSSQ
DQ14
DQ13
VCCQ
DQ12
DQ11
VSSQ
DQ10
DQ9
VCCQ
DQ8
VSS
NC
UDQM
CLK
CLKE
NC
A11
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
VSS
C91
0.1U
C92
0.1U
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
VCC
DQ0
VCCQ
DQ1
DQ2
VSSQ
DQ3
DQ4
VCCQ
DQ5
DQ6
VSSQ
DQ7
VCC
LDQM
WE
CAS
RAS
CS
BA0
BA1
A10
A0
A1
A2
A3
VCC
IC6
C90
0.1U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
C93
0.1U
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
C94
0.1U
TP851
TP816
TP812
TP852
VCC3
C95
0.1U
C83
NM
DQM1
SDCLK
SDCKE
(2)
(2)
(2)
R85
RAMDB8
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB12
RAMDB11
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB15
0J
MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4
RAMDB[15..0]
(2)
MAD[12..0] (2)
4/16
C16
(2,3) (/ASIC_RST)
(1)
R64
RESETOUT1
1U<2012> 0.1U
C290
33J
CT
33J
C79
47P
TP395
R345
1KJ
OP Reset
R28
ASIC Reset
BU4212F
GND
VDD VOUT
IC3
Reset Circuit
R29
10KJ
VCC3
C26
47P
C18
NM
/OP_RST
TP386
0.01U
C17
TP786
R27
100KJ
VCC3
(9,10)
/ASIC_RST
TP383
(16)
/RESET0
(2,4,9,12)
(2,4,9,12) /RESET0
MIRCNT
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(1,2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
VSAMP
CCD_TG
CCD_RS
BSAMP
CCD_CP
CCD_PHI1
CCD_PHI2
ADCLK
(9,10)
PB_NOE
(9,10) PB_NAE0
(9,10) PB_NWE
(1,2,3,4)
/RD
AFE_SDI
AFE_SEN
AFE_SCK
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
VIDEO#
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
TM
TM_
(1,2)
(1)
SPFMT0
(1)
SPFMT1
(1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(1)
SPFMT3
(2)
MIRON
(2)
SPFON
(2)
/ASIC_RST
/RESET#
(16)
R71
10KJ
R121
/OP_RST
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
OP_LATCH
(9,10)
(2)
(2)
(2)
R72
10KJ
100J
TP718
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
33P
3.3V
C117
TP378
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
IC23
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
TC74VHC244FT
VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
NM_100J
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC26
74VHCT244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC20
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC16
74LCX244
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC13
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND
IC19
R110
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10
TP396
TP397
TP398
5V
TP384
TP385
TP387
TP388
TP389
TP390
TP391
TP900
TP899
TP898
TP897
TP896
TP895
TP894
TP893
TP412
TP413
TP414
TP415
TP416
TP417
TP418
TP419
R332
R333
R336
R338
R344
R354
R355
R360
FWREN
R226
NM_10KJ
R237
10KJ
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(/RD)
VSAMP#
33J
CCD_TG#
33J
CCD_RS#
33J
33J BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
33J
CCD_PHI1#
33J
CCD_PHI2#
33J
ADCLK#
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
4
3
2
1
TP833
AFE_SDI#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SCK#
R224
0J
VCC3
R373
R374
R375
R376
R223
NM_0J
100J
33JX4
BR61
5V
5
6
7
8
100J
33J
33J
33J
3.3V
33J
33J
33J
5V
R109
R101
R96
R97
R98
3.3V
R361
R370
R371
C110
0.1U
C127
0.1U
VCC3
(2)
TP404
TP405
TP406
TP407
TP408
TP409
TP410
TP411
VCC3
C128
0.1U
0.1U
C105
VCC3
TP370
TP371
TP372
TP373
TP374
TP375
TP379
TP380
VCC3
C255
0.1U
NM
C104
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
NM_TC7SH32FU
IC46
VSAMP#
CCD_TG#
CCD_RS#
BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
ADCLK#
(13)
(13)
(13)
(13)
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(/RD)
VCC3
(14)
(14)
(14)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
LCDDB4#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#
LCDE#
LCDRS#
AFE_SDI#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SCK#
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(7)
(7)
/VIDEO
(KEYSC1)
(KEYSC2)
(KEYSC3)
(TM)
(TM_)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
R119
R120
(2,3)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(13)
(15)
(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT3)
(/ASIC_RST)
(OP_CLK)
(OP_DATA)
(OP_LATCH)
/FAX_RST
/NIC_RST
1KJ
33J
TP814
C116
NM
C120
NM
C121
NM
C122
NM
C123
NM
C124
NM
C125
NM
C126
NM
/RESET1
ADCLK#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_CP#
BSAMP#
CCD_RS#
CCD_TG#
VSAMP#
/RESET#
0.01U
C310
MCU PWB (Driver section 1)
0.1U
C114
0.1U
C115
NM
C311
5
3
(1)
(11)
/SYNC
FW
R93
10KJ
C306
NM
C307
NM
C308
NM
C309
NM
C129
NM
C130
NM
C131
NM
NM
C376
VCC3
(14) mt_at_home
(11)
R89
NM
(/RD)
(PB_NWE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NOE)
AFE_SCK#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SDI#
5V
47P
GND
Y2
GND
Y2
Y1
Vcc
TP394
0.1U
R100
3.3V
0.1U
C96
TP377
VCC3
C103
VCC3
TP393
NC7WZ17
A2
Y1
NC7WZ17
A2
A1
IC11
A1
Vcc
TP381
IC14
TP376
C99
3.3V
5V
33J
R91
3.3V
33J
(FW)
(1,9)
mt_at_home#
(/SYNC)
5/16
(2)
(1)
PR
MM_Y1
MM_Y2
MM_Y3
PMD
PMCLK
LDEN
/LEND
R116
10KJ
(1) MMCLK
100J
R339
(2)
VFM_24V
(2) VFMCNT_12V
TP474
TP797
TP799
TP798
100J
10KJ
10KJ
R268
PR#
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TP475
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC
Q21
TP464
TP805
TP806
TP807
KRC102S
KRC102S
Q14
TP723
TP722
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
10KJ
R269
R418
NM_10KJ
KID65503F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G
R304
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IC27
R142
NM_10KJ
R414
NM_10KJ
VCC3
R419
NM_10KJ
VCC3
TP792
TP785
TP790
TP789
10KJ
R270
10KJ
R265
R271
10KJ
R266
MC
BIAS
TC
GRIDL
MCNT
PSFM
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
3
TP467
MMref0
MMref1
MMref2
/PMD
PMCLK_A
/LDEN
CPFS1
CPFS2
MPFS
RRS
R395 1.5KJ
R396 1.5KJ
(7)
(7)
(7)
(11)
(11)
(11)
Q16
R379
R380
Q17
KRC102S
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Q4
(12)
D45
1SS355
TP466
INT24V
NM_1.5KJ
NM_1.5KJ
1.5KJX4
8
7
6
5
PGND
TP429
D61
1SS355
/PR
SHOLD
TP801
TP800
TP795
TP793
TP794
PGND
TP437
TP439
TP440
TP441
TP442
TP445
TP446
24V
/PR
TP455
TP449
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
MMD
MRPS1
MRPS2
MRPS3
POFF
HL
FTH
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM
KID65001AF
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E
IC25
KRC102S
R117
10KJ
Q20
KRA119S
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BR62
1
2
3
4
KRC102S
/MMCLK
TP784
TP781
PGND
1.5KJX4
TP420
8
TP421
7
TP422
6
TP423
5
TP426
TP428
TP435
1
1
BR63
1
2
3
4
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM
(11)
(11)
R296
10KJ
PGND
KID65001AF
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E
R90
10KJ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
IC21
R386
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TP430
47KJ
R363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
KID65503F
1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G
IC24
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
TP461
TP802
TP803
TP804
B
D56
CRH01
/MMD
MRPS_1
MRPS_2
MRPS_3
/POFF
TP457
12V
(12)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(11)
0603SFF150FM/32-2
Q13
2SB1132
TP454
CP17
CRH01
D55
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24V
R413
NM_10KJ
1SS355
(12)
/VFMCNT
PSFMOUT
D51
CP16
5V
PGND
Q12
2SB1132
TP451
47KJ
D58
RLS-73
TP456
R389
TP448
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
Q7
KTA1505S
47KJ
D57
RLS-73
TP450
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
R387
24V
/CPFS1
/CPFS2
/MPFS
/RRS
R388
TP447
D52
MTZ J22B
TP443
24V
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(12)
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
R362
/MC
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MCNT
E
C
E
C
1SS355
D5
TP459
INT5V
R298
1.5KF
24V
HLOUT
TP431
(11)
Q2
NM_KTA1505S
R297
47KJ
R115
100J1/4W<3216>
TP460
TP444
NM_47KJ
R108
PTPULSE
NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
Q3
KRA119S
(12)
R112
(2)
PGND
EN5V
TP470
(12)
KIA358F-EL/P
IC45B
VFMOUT
D36
1SS355
TP432
1SS355
D4
1U<2012>
C312
Q18
KRC102S
NM
R368
LCDCONT
R316
NM
VCC3
12KF
R264
(16)
TCS_AN
R129
NM
MA700
D1
5V
R378
0J
R103
1MF
VCC3
R302
10KJ
VCC3
5V
R366 0J
NM_KDS226
D59
R307
7.5KF
TP469
12V
TP463
TP458
R107
4.3KF
TP436
VCC3
12V
12V
TP472
R393
0J
IC22B
KIA393F
TP465
KIA358F-EL/P
IC53B
0.1U
C305
EN5V
TP473
R381
NM
10KJ
R382
Q15
TP553
VCC3
0.1U
C113
NM
C371
NM_KDS226
VCC3
TP476
0.1U
C398
NM_2SB1197K
D60
R383
NM
R114
100J
VCC3
KDS226
D3
KDS226
D67
R394
NM
C407
NM
22000P
C119
R308
NM
PR#
0.1U/50V<1608>
R124
4.7KJ
VCC3
TP453
C118
R113
300J
0.1U/50V<1608>
C111
KIA358F-EL/P
12V
12V
Q19
2SK3018
R105
1KJ
VCC3
(S)
(D)
TP452
IC53A
IC22A
KIA393F
(G)
KIA358F-EL/P
IC45A
EN5V
12V
12V
C379
0.1U
TP427
R303
10KJ
IC17A
KIA393F
R104
7.5KF
VCC3
12V
NM_KDS226
D66
R123
10KF
R118
1.2KF
VCC3
C112
22000P
NM_KDS226
D2
R106
10KF
TP438
R301
4.7KJ
TP433
R102
1KF
LCD Contrast Buffer
RTH_IN
C367
2.2U<2012>
TP425
R300
470KJ
Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer
(1)
(12)
3
TP424
R299
100J
VCC3
8
4
8
4
(TCS_AN)
(11)
(1)
(3)
(1)
TP434
KIA393F
IC17B
THOPEN
RTH
FTH
(LCDCONT)
12V
6/16
8
4
8
4
8
4
8
4
8
4
8
4
E
C
(TM)
(TM_)
(5)
MRPS_1
MRPS_2
MRPS_3
(5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT3)
MMref0
MMref1
MMref2
(6)
(6)
(6)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
OUT_AOUT_A+
OUT_B+
OUT_B-
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
R160
300J
R150
2KJ
R161
620J
R162
1.2KJ
PGND
C144
NM_10U/10V<2012>
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5V
TP478
VS
SENSE 1
COMP 1
OUT 1B
I01
GND
GND
I11
PHASE 1
VREF 1
RC 1
VSS
PGND
C138
0.1U
L6219DS
OUT 1A
OUT 2A
SENSE 2
COMP 2
OUT 2B
GND
GND
I02
I12
PHASE 2
VREF 2
RC 2
IC32
R158
1J 2W
2
Vs
N.C
OUT2
OUT1
Vref
TA7291AS
GND
IN2
IN1
Vcc
IC36
R312
0J <1608>
Vs
R149
30KJ
R164
4.7KJ
GND
OUT A
OUT A
OUT A/
OUT A/
OUT B
OUT B
OUT B/
OUT B/
PGND
STA7100M
Sense B
Sense A
Sync
REF
IN A
IN A/
IN B
IN B/
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
24VSCMT 5V
Tonner Motor Driver
PGND
R157
1J 2W
14
8
7
11
12
IC34
SPF Motor Driver
PGND
C145
0.1U/50V<1608>
5V
PGND
R309
NM_0J <1608>
0.1U
C141
R159
1.2KJ
PGND
5V
PGND
R148
30KJ
TP488
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_PH_B
C135
820P
TP489
(2)
(2)
(2)
TP483
R146
1.5KJ
PGND
C137
0.1U
R163
100J
R152
510J
10KJX4
BR66
R151
1KJ
5V
C134
820P
R147
1KJ
PGND
0.68J 1W
R144
Scanner Motor Driver
4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8
10
1
2
3
4
17
18
15
16
13
PGND
(2)
(2)
(2)
24VSPFMT
C136
820P
TP487
MM_AI1
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
(11)
(11)
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
TMB_O
TMA_O
(12)
(12)
(11)
24V
(11)
SPMT_2
PGND
SPMT_0
C133
820P
0.68J 1W
C142
10U/35V
0.1U/50V<1608>
C143
TP481
R145
1.5KJ
R143
C139
47U/35V
PGND
24V
C140
0.1U/50V
<1608>
24VSFTMT
CP6
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VSPFSOL
CP5
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VDupMT
CP3
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VSPFMT
CP2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
24VSCMT
CP1
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(3)
(3)
(3)
SPUS
SRVC
(RSV_SOL)
TP503
TP502
TP501
PGND
1.2KJ
R404
1.2KJ
R403
NM_1.2KJ
R275
PGND
TP499
TP496
TP497
TP494
TP491
TP492
PGND
TP485
TP482
TP484
TP480
TP477
TP479
R408
10KJ
R407
10KJ
TP506
17
18
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
8
16
IC33
O4
O3
O2
O1
COM
COM
TD62064AF
GND
GND
I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC
1
8
16
D41
D42
D43
1SS355 1SS355 1SS355
Q23
2SD1781K
Q24
2SD1781K
Q25
NM_2SD1781K
TP505
R406
NM_10KJ
TP504
O4
O3
O2
O1
COM
COM
TD62064AF
GND
GND
I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC
IC31
/SPUS
/SRVC
MTZ J22B
D9
/SFTMT3
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT0
MTZ J22B
D8
/DMT3
/DMT2
/DMT1
/DMT0
(11)
(11)
(11)
24VSPFSOL
/RSV_SOL
Shifter Motor Driver
17
18
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Duplex Motor Driver
RSPF Solenoid Driver
SFTMT3
SFTMT2
(3)
SFTMT1
(3)
SFTMT0
(3)
(3)
DMT3
DMT2
(1)
(1)
DMT1
DMT0
(1)
(1)
24VSFTMT
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
24VDupMT
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
7/16
NM
C156
NM
C163
0.1U
C155
NM
C162
0.1U
(11)
C181
1000P
C180
1000P
12VIN
TP510
TP509
0.1U
C165
NM
C158
0.1U
C149
1000P
C182
TP511
R194
10J
0.1U
C166
NM
C159
NM
C150
47U/35V
C190
22U/16V
C204
47U/25V
C194
0.1U
C168
0.1U
C161
NM
C152
PGND
1000P
C183
TP512
R195
10J
0.1U
C167
0.1U
C160
NM
C151
L4
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB4
0J <1608>
R193
10J
0.1U
C164
NM
C157
0.1U
C148
R192
10J
VCC3
C147
24V
1000P
C185
TP514
R197
10J
NM
C170
NM
C154
12V
0.1U
C206
R127
100KJ
5V
R126
100KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>
C196
R125
100KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>
C191
1000P
C184
TP513
R196
10J
0.1U
C169
NM
C153
(11)
INT24V
3.3VIN
R203
0J
IN
IC37
C195
22U/16V
C205
22U/16V
2 KIA7805
GND
OUT
D25
1SS355
R204
0J
L5
ZJSR5101-223TA
FB5
NM_0J <1608>
47U/35V
C192
R206
100J 2W
R202
0J
0.1U
C207
0.1U
C197
0.1U
C193
R205
0J
TP518
0.1U
TP517
KDS226
D20
C179
5V
PGND
R179
1KJ 2W
INT24V
TP516
R187
2.7KJ
R186
20KJ
TP508
1SS355
D19
PGND
D14
1SS355
0.22J 2W
R175
TP515
R185
20KJ
(12) 24V1(DSWS)
0.1U
C146
VCC3
MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section)
R130
100KJ
EN5V
R128
100KJ
VCC3
INT5V
DSWS
(3)
(16)
(16)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
R305
R306
(12)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(11)
(11)
MFD
MMLD
FANLK
PSFANLK
DVSEL
TCS
POD
PMRDY
SCOD
SPID
SRJD
PPD3
PD1
PD2
CED1
CED2
DRST
PPD1
PPD2
SPPD
PSW
D63
100J
100J
D62
UDZS3.9B
UDZS3.9B
KDS226
D21
KDS226
D15
KDS226
D10
5V
5V
KDS226
D30
KDS226
D26
KDS226
D23
VCC3
TP831
TP830
5V
5V
5V
KDS226
D31
KDS226
D27
KDS226
D24
KDS226
D22
KDS226
D16
KDS226
D11
1
3
KDS226
D54
KDS226
D37
KDS226
D17
KDS226
D12
KDS226
D28
1000P
C198
R207
15KJ
1000P
C199
1000P
C200
R209
4.7KJ
1000P
R208
15KJ
C187
R189
1KJ
1000P
C186
R188
1KJ
KDS226
D18
KDS226
D13
1000P
C201
R210
4.7KJ
1000P
C188
R190
15KJ
1000P
C171
R167
15KJ
R211
4.7KJ
1000P
C189
R191
4.7KJ
1000P
C172
R168
15KJ
VCC3
1000P
C372
R340
4.7KJ
KDS226
D32
KDS226
D29
1000P
C380
1000P
C174
R170
4.7KJ
R377
4.7KJ
VCC3
1000P
C173
R169
15KJ
R198
R199
R200
R201
R367
R372
1000P
C175
R171
4.7KJ
1000P
C202
R212
12KJ
1000P
C177
R173
15KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1000P
C203
R218
R219
R220
R214
R215
R216
R217
R213
3.3KJ
VCC3
1000P
C176
R172
4.7KJ
R183
R184
R176
R177
R178
R180
R181
R182
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
DVS1
(TCS)
(MFD)
(MMLD)
(FANLK)
(PSFANLK)
1000P
C178
R174
4.7KJ
VCC3
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(CED1)
(CED2)
(DRST)
(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(SPPD)
(PSW)
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)
(POD)
(PMRDY)
(SCOD)
(SPID)
(SRJD)
(PPD3)
(PD1)
(PD2)
8/16
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
R239
VCC3
R240
R241
R242
R243
R244
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
TRST_L
R137
33J
R138
NM
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
NM_10KJ
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0
(1) /RES_OA982
(5,10) /OP_RST
(2) PODATA[7..0]
/FPOFF
C216
NM
R342
R343
C100
1000P
(12)
PODATA7
PODATA6
PODATA5
PODATA4
PODATA3
PODATA2
PODATA1
PODATA0
10KJ
R238
(5,10)
(5,10)
/ES_PAGE
/ES_CRDY
/ES_SRDY
WAKEUP
(1)
(3)
(1)
(10)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(10)
(2)
(2)
C254
33P
R247
R248
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)
TRST_L
VCC3
R245
R246
X4
AT-49(18.3856MHz)
R249
0J
4.7KJ
NM_0J
C252
33P
TRST_L
33JX4
R369
NM
XIN
XOUT
4.7KJ
4.7KJ
NM
NM
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
TP667
TP668
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
/FPOFF
33JX4
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
1
2
3
4
BR80 1
2
3
4
BR81
/POREQ
/POACK
/H_SYNC
/SC_LINE
INT_USBD
/PR_LINE
/FPOFF
(2) /IMC_READY
(13)
MDM_IRQ
(10) SUSPEND(USB2.0)
(12) OA982_READY
MODEM_IN
(FW)
DT_ACKB
DT_REQB
ES_CMD
ES_STS
BR78 1 33JX4
2
3
4
BR79 1
2
3
4
33JX4
PB_NWE
PB_NOE
PB_NCS3
PB_NAE0
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
RY_BY
BR76 1 33JX4
2
3
4
BR77 1
2
3
4
33JX4
PB_NCS1
CLK_EXT
OA_RX
OA_TX
(13)
(1,5)
(10)
(10)
(1)
(1)
PB_ADDR0
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7
12P
C366
(10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0]
(10)
(5,10)
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
(13)
12P
C362
(10,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
RY_BY
12P
C381
10KJ
(12)
(12)
12P
C382
R351
PIDATA7
PIDATA6
PIDATA5
PIDATA4
PIDATA3
PIDATA2
PIDATA1
PIDATA0
/PIACK
/PIREQ
(2)
(2)
12P
C383
VCC3
PIDATA[7..0]
12P
C384
(2)
/PIWR
(2)
MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2)
12P
C385
TP596
TP598
TP600
TP602
TP604
TP606
TP607
TP609
TP611
TP612
TP613
TP614
TP615
TP616
TP617
TP618
TP669
5
4
172
177
CLK_EXT
TP666
112
113
114
116
117
118
175
176
TP663
TP664
TP665
37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52
24
26
28
29
30
31
32
34
15
16
19
21
22
23
1
2
8
9
11
12
13
14
TP650
TP651
TP652
TP653
TP654
TP655
TP656
TP657
TP658
TP659
TP660
TP661
TP662
TP642
TP643
TP644
TP645
TP646
TP647
TP648
TP638
TP639
TP640
TP631
TP632
TP633
TP634
TP629
199
201
202
203
204
205
207
208
178
180
181
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
194
195
196
197
198
TP589
TP591
TP593
TP619
TP620
TP621
TP622
TP623
TP624
TP625
TP626
168
169
170
TP557
TP559
TP560
TP562
TP564
TP566
TP568
TP569
TP571
TP573
TP575
TP576
TP578
TP580
TP582
TP584
TP586
119
120
124
125
126
127
128
129
131
132
133
134
135
137
138
141
142
143
145
146
147
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167
TP519
TP521
TP523
TP525
TP527
TP529
TP531
TP533
TP535
TP537
TP539
TP541
TP543
TP545
TP547
TP549
TP551
CLK_EXT
OA-982
XIN
XOUT
TEST_MODE0
TEST_MODE1
RESET_L
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
TRST_L
USB_DM
USB_DP
R250
4.7KJ
PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK
PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS
PO_REQ/ANA_SD0
PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0
PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2
PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1
PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M
PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2
PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1
PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2
PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1
PO_DATA2/PLOAD
PO_DATA1/PCLK
PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C
GP_A0
GP_A1
GP_A2/DC_CHY1
GP_A3/DC_CHX1
GP_A4/DC_PWM1
GP_A5/DC_CHY0
GP_A6/DC_CHX0
GP_A7/DC_PWM0
GP_D0/ADC_A0
GP_D1/ADC_A1
GP_D2/ADC_A2
GP_D3/ADC_CLK
GP_D4/ADC_DATA
GP_D5/ADC_NCS
GP_B0/USART0_TX
GP_B1/USART0_RX
GP_B2/USART0_CK
GP_B3/ANA_SD1
GP_B4/DT_ACKB
GP_B5/DT_REQB
GP_B6/DT_ACKA
GP_B7/DT_REQA
GP_C0/PB_ADDR0
GP_C1/PB_ADDR1
GP_C2/PB_ADDR2
GP_C3/PB_ADDR3
GP_C4/PB_ADDR4
GP_C5/PB_ADDR5
GP_C6/PB_ADDR6
GP_C7/PB_ADDR7
REG_A9/PB_NCS1
REG_A8/PB_NCS2
REG_AD7/PB_DATA7
REG_AD6/PB_DATA6
REG_AD5/PB_DATA5
REG_AD4/PB_DATA4
REG_AD3/PB_DATA3
REG_AD2/PB_DATA2
REG_AD1/PB_DATA1
REG_AD0/PB_DATA0
REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0
REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3
REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0
REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1
REG_RDY/PB_NWE
INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE
BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1
CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2
MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0
PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX
PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX
PP_NINIT
PP_NFAULT
PP_NSELECTIN
PP_NAUTOFD
PP_SELECT
PP_PERROR
PP_BUSY
PP_NACK
PP_DATA7
PP_DATA6
PP_DATA5
PP_DATA4
PP_DATA3
PP_DATA2
PP_DATA1/USART1_CK
PP_DATA0
PP_NSTROBE
PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6
PI_TR_TGEN
PI_TGEN6
PI_TGEN5
PI_TGEN4
PI_TGEN3
PI_TGEN2
PI_TGEN1
PI_TGEN0
PI_DATA7
PI_DATA6
PI_DATA5
PI_DATA4
PI_DATA3
PI_DATA2
PI_DATA1
PI_DATA0
IC38
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
PLLSS_VSSA
PLLSS_VDDA
PLLCS_VSSA
PLLCS_VDDA
SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_CKE
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_CS1B_L
ROM_CS_L
SDRAM_DQMA0
SDRAM_DQMB0
SDRAM_DQMA1
SDRAM_DQMB1
SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_DATA12
SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_DATA14
SDRAM_DATA15
TP552
TP554
TP556
TP558
SDRAM_DQMA0
SDRAM_DQMB0
SDRAM_DQMA1
SDRAM_DQMB1
SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_CS1A_L
TP565
TP567
74
73
72
68
67
66
65
63
62
61
60
58
57
56
55
53
109
107
106
105
104
102
77
75
17
35
69
87
121
139
173
191
10
27
41
54
64
76
86
98
108
123
136
150
164
179
193
206
18
36
70
88
122
140
174
192
3
20
25
33
46
59
71
81
93
103
115
130
144
158
171
184
200
148
149
79
78
OA3.3V
OA3.3V
C214
0.01U
C212
0.01U
C240
0.1U
33J
TP610
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
33JX4
C241
0.1U
C228
0.1U
C219
0.1U
C242
0.1U
C229
0.1U
C220
0.1U
C397
10U/10V<2012>
C215
1U<2012>
C227
0.1U
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
OA3.3V
R227
R228
R229
C213
1U<2012>
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
C218
0.1U
TP608
R234
SDRAM_CKE
TP577
BR72
TP579
TP581
TP583
TP585
BR73
TP587
TP588
TP590
TP592
BR74
TP594
TP595
TP597
TP599
BR75
TP601
TP603
TP605
100
99
97
96
95
94
92
91
90
89
85
82
80
84
83
TP570
TP572
TP574
111
110
101
1 BR71
2
3
4
1 BR67
2
3
4
1 BR68
2
3
4
1 BR69
2
3
4
1 BR70
2
3
4
R222
R390
R225
TP561
TP563
TP520
TP522
TP524
TP526
TP528
TP530
TP532
TP534
TP536
TP538
TP540
TP542
TP544
TP546
TP548
TP550
SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_DATA12
SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_DATA14
SDRAM_DATA15
C243
0.1U
C230
0.1U
C221
0.1U
C244
0.1U
C231
0.1U
C222
0.1U
C396
10U/10V<2012>
C211
NM
C245
0.1U
C232
0.1U
C223
0.1U
R235
R236
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
C246
0.1U
C233
0.1U
C224
0.1U
C226
0.1U
10KJX4
10KJX4
10KJX4
10KJX4
C251
NM
C253
47P
_SDRAM_CKE
C303
NM
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
VCC3
L6
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
FB6
0J <1608>
_SDRAM_CS0_L
_SDRAM_CS1A_L
BR82 1
2
3
4
BR83 1
2
3
4
BR84 1
2
3
4
BR85 1
2
3
4
C217
10U/10V<2012>
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
C247
0.1U
C234
0.1U
C225
0.1U
C395
10U/10V<2012>
OA3.3V
VCC3
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
_SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
_SDRAM_CLK
_SDRAM_CKE
TP730
TP731
TP732
TP733
33J
4.7KJ
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
ROM_CS_L
_SDRAM_CS0_L
_SDRAM_CS1A_L
_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMB0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
_SDRAM_DQMB1
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
8 33JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
NM
TP728
_SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
_SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
R232
VCC3
_SDRAM_DQMB0
_SDRAM_DQMB1
_SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
10KJ
R230
NM
R233
NM
R231
22000P
C210
12P
C386
15
_SDRAM_DQMA1
_SDRAM_DQMA0
ROM_CS_L
RY_BY
C265
NM
_SDRAM_CLK
TP925
IC39
GND
GND
VCC
VCCW
IO0
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
IO6
IO7
IO8
IO9
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15/A-1
TP764
TP765
TP766
TP767
TP768
TP769
TP770
TP771
TP772
TP773
TP774
TP775
TP776
TP777
TP778
TP930
_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
TP926
_SDRAM_CKE
_SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
TP912
_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
TP791
_SDRAM_CKE
40
15
39
38
37
19
16
17
18
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
36
20
21
40
15
39
38
37
19
16
17
18
23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
36
20
21
46
27
37
13
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
VCC3
VSS
VSS
VSS
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
HY57V561620FTP-H-C
N.C
LDQM
UDQM
CLK
CKE
CS
WE
CAS
RAS
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
BA0
BA1
IC44
54
41
28
52
46
12
6
27
14
1
49
43
9
3
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
54
41
28
52
46
12
6
27
14
1
49
43
9
3
2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53
C209
0.1U
10KJ
R346
VCC3
VCC3
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
VCC3
C300
0.1U
C235
0.1U
TP748
TP749
TP750
TP751
TP752
TP753
TP754
TP755
TP756
TP757
TP758
TP759
TP760
TP761
TP762
TP763
9/16
C256
0.1U
C299
0.1U
C248
0.1U
C236
0.1U
VPP
(4)
C250
0.1U
C238
0.1U
C263
0.1U
C302
0.1U
C264
0.1U
C301
0.1U
VCC3
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
C249
0.1U
C237
0.1U
VCC3
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
C208
NM
NM
R221
VCC3
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15
_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
TP809
TP810
TP901
TP902
TP909
TP910
TP911
SDRAM_ADDR0
HY57V561620FTP-H-C
N.C
LDQM
UDQM
CLK
CKE
CS
WE
CAS
RAS
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
BA0
BA1
IC40
8M/16M Flash ROM
BYTE
WP/ACC
RESET
RY/BY
WE
OE
CE
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
_SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
C239
NM
_SDRAM_CLK
TP796
TP788
TP787
TP780
TP779
SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
TP744
TP745
11
28
26
TP808
47
14
12
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
16
9
10
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L
(9)
PB_NAE0
DT_ACKB
(5,9)
L7
C410
0.1U
BLM21PG600SN1
TP880
5
4
3
2
1
VCC3
IC183
TC7SH126FU
USB2.0 DEV1
SHIELD
GND
+D
-D
+5V
CN1
UBR23-4K2200
FG
100KJ
R399
(9)
C274
0.01U
DLW21SN900SQ2
TP908
VCC3
BLM21PG600SN1
L9
L8
R111
1MF
C271
0.1U
PB_NCS3
R267
NM_<1608>
C404
1U<2012>
TP907
GND
C270
0.1U
VCC3
MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2)
C409
0.1U
C408
0.1U
(5,9) /OP_RST
TC7SH04FU
TC7SH08FU
IC43
FG
(1) /RES_USB20
IC42
VCC3
2
3
5
1
VCC3
12KF
R272
TP709
GND
L11
0J <1608>
TP708
TP703
R139
33J
R310
NM
R257
10KJ
R254
NM
VCC3
NM
R273
(9,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
C101
1000P
TP706
TP705
(9)
WAKEUP
(9) SUSPEND(USB2.0)
VCC3
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
TP702
R260
10KJ
10KJ
R251
0.1U
10KJ
R401
10KJ
R252
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7
0J
R274
TP707
R261
10KJ
C266
0.1U
C257
0.01U
(9)
TP704
C268
0.1U
C259
0.01U
INT_USBD
10KJ
NM
DT_REQB
DT_ACKB
1.5KJ
R262
R258
R259
(9)
(9)
VCC3
C267
0.1U
C258
0.01U
(5,9)
(5,9)
TP683
TP685
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
R255
10KJ
VCC3
C269
0.1U
ISP33
C260
0.01U
ISP33
TP870
AGND
RPU
DP
DM
AGND
RREF
RESET_N
EOT
DREQ
DACK
DIOR
DIOW
DGND
INTRQ
READY/IORDY
INT
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
IC41
TP677
TP871
R253
1.2KJ
VCC3
C273
18P
TP783
AT-49(12MHz)
X6
C272
15P
GND
0.1U
C403
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
ISP1583BS
TP682
TP681
TP782
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
C406
10U/10V<2012>
TP675
TP701
TP695
TP694
TP693
TP692
TP691
TP690
TP689
TP688
TP687
TP686
TP684
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR0
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
R256
TP700
TP699
TP698
TP697
TP696
10KJ
VCC3
PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3
C262
0.1U
0J <1608>
TP670
L13
C261
10U/10V<2012>
ISP33
DATA10
DATA9
DATA8
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
VCC(I/O)
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
ALE/A0
DGND
MODE1
N.C.
SUSPEND
WAKEUP
BUS_CONF/DA0
VCC(3V3)
MODE0/DA1
DGND
XTAL1
XTAL2
VCC1V8
VBUS
VCC(I/O)
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11
DA2
CS_N
RW_N/RD_N
DS_N/WR_N
CS0_N
CS1_N
AD0
AD1
AD2
VCC(I/O)
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
VCC1V8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
C405
10KJ
R400
DGND
DIE
0.1U
C370
(9,13)
PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13)
PB_ADDR[7:0]
10/16
To LD
(6)
(5)
(6)
/LDEN
/VIDEO
SHOLD
/SYNC
SPPD
(8)
(5)
SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
SPID
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(5)
(6)
5V
C275
0.1U/50V<1608>
EN5V
5V
1KJ
5V
KDS226
D65
24VSPFMT
INT5V
(6)
(8)
(6)
PGND
24V
(8)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A
B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CN42
To LSU
SPPD
SPID
SPMT_3
SPMT_1
SPMT_2
SPMT_0
(8)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
(6)
(6)
5V
200J1/4W<3216>
5V
PGND
(7)
/SRVC
(7)
(7)
/SPUS
(8)
/RSV_SOL
(8)
SCOD
SRJD
NM_<1608>
24VSPFSOL
R347
To Polygon motor
B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
1
2
3
4
5
CN41
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
To RSPF unit
PGND
HLOUT
/POFF
24V
3.3VIN
CN30
PGND
(White)
24V
(6)
(6)
(8)
/TC
/MC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
5V
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
CN2
CN29
NM_<1608>
C276
24VSPFMT
To SPF unit
R282
R278
EN5V
5V
12VIN
FW
/PR
R140
/BIAS
/GRIDL
200J1/4W<3216>
INT24V
200J1/4W<3216>
(6)
(6)
200J1/4W<3216>
(3)
KEYIN
R277
C277
1000P
1KJ
R276
10KJ
5V
1
3
LCDDB4#
(5)
(5)
LCDRS#
LCDE#
LCDDB5#
(5)
(5)
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#
INFOLED
BL
PSL
(5)
(5)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(6) (LCDCONT)
KDS226
D33
R290
R291
R292
R293
R294
R295
100J
100P
C317
100J
100P
C347
100P
C349
(LCDRS)
(LCDE)
(LCDDB4)
100P
100J
100P
SELIN3
C359
(3)
C356
(LCDDB5)
100P
100J
100P
R328
C360
100J
C357
100J
SELIN2
R329
R330
100P
(3)
SELIN1
100P
(LCDDB6)
(3)
R365
100J
C361
100J
0J
0J
(LCDDB7)
R398
0J
R385
PSW
(OP_DATA)
(OP_CLK)
(OP_LATCH)
(5)
(LCDRS)
(LCDE)
(LCDDB4)
(LCDDB5)
(LCDDB6)
(LCDDB7)
DRST
(KEYSC3)
(KEYSC2)
(KEYSC1)
BZR
(8)
(5)
(5)
(8)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(1)
5V
C358
100J
NM
NM
0J
R350
R352
R331
0J
R353
(SELIN1)
(SELIN2)
(SELIN3)
EN5V
To Operational PWB
NM
C363
NM
C365
INT5V
R349
NM
C364
CP10
To Power unit
R141
VCC3
1000P
C278
MCU PWB (Connector section 1)
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP8
1000P
C279
0603SFF150FM/32-2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP9
1000P
C280
(SELIN3)
(SELIN2)
(SELIN1)
FF4-32-S15D5
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN3
11/16
(6)
(8)
(6)
(6)
(8)
(6)
TMA_O
TMB_O
/SFTMT0
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT3
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
OUT_A+
OUT_B+
OUT_AOUT_B-
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
To Duplex motor
(White)
To Mirror motor
24VSFTMT
To Toner motor
To Shifter motor
(White)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN27
(White)
B2P-VH(LF)(SN)
1
2
CN25
(Red)
To VF Fan motor
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
CN16
(White)
B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
To Main motor
B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN20
PGND
PGND
CN22
24VDupMT
C286
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
C285
C282
C281
(7)
(7)
/DMT0
/DMT1
/DMT2
/DMT3
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
VFMOUT
FANLK
/VFMCNT
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK
1
2
3
4
5
(8)
(6)
(6)
PD1
POD
PPD1
CED1
/RRS
/CPFS1
24V1(DSWS)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
5V
5V
(Black)
To Paper pass detect
To Paper out detect
To Paper detect
(Green)
B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN28
(White)
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN26
R286
200J1/4W<3216>
(Red)
B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN24
To Cassette paper
solenoid
(Red)
To Cassette detect
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN21
(Blue)
To Interlock switch
B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
CN10
To Resist roller
solenoid
B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN18
(White)
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
CN15
R285
200J1/4W<3216>
24V
24V
PGND
0.1U/50V<1608>
C283
CN12
0.1U/50V<1608>
C284
CP21
0J <1608>
(6)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(6)
PD2
CED2
PPD3
PGND
/MCNT
MFD
(8)
/CPFS2
/MPFS
(6)
RTH_IN
(6)
5V
24V
5V
24V
CN19
(Red)
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
24V
(Red)
NM_B3B-PH-K-R
3
2
1
CN23
(White)
5V
PGND
VCC3
LT1P67A
D38
TP712
(2) GASIC_READY
To Mecha. COUNTER
B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
To Multi unit
To HL unit
B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN14
(White)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
5
CN11
R283
200J1/4W<3216>
1/4W
To 2nd. cassette
R284
200J1/4W<3216>
PPD2
(8)
1000P
C287
1000P
1000P
C288
24V
NM
C373
INT24V
NM_<1608>
390J
MCU PWB (Connector section 2)
C374
R287
C289
PSFMOUT
PSFANLK
VCC3
LED for Checker
(6)
(8)
NM_LT1P67A
Q9
NM_KRC106S
3
(White)
1
3
5
7
9
CN17
TP713
TP710
1000P
C368
2
4
6
8
10
VCC3
D40
NM_LT1P67A
Q10
NM_KRC106S
3
PGND
(White)
NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
3
2
1
CN35
TCK
/RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
OA_TX
OA_RX
VCC3
TCK
/RESET0
OA_TX
OA_RX
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1
2
3
4
CN13
To PS Fan motor
(9) OA982_READY
D39
VCC3
(For debug)
12/16
OA982 JTAG & Serial
RxD
TxD
(9)
TRST_L
(9)
TMS
(9)
TDO
(9)
TDI
(9)
TCK
(2,4,5,9) /RESET0
(9)
OA_TX
(9)
OA_RX
(1)
(1)
CPU Serial
Not mounted
NM
R288
TP714
TP711
NM
R289
(1)
/CS5
TP725
100J
R391
NM
C378
(3)
(5)
/FAX_RST
MSU_ST1
(1) /RES_FAX
(9)
MDM_IRQ
R313
100J
R325
NM
KDS226
D47
VCC3
R311
1KJ
PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
MSU_ST1
D[15..0]
C327
10KJ
33JX4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
33JX4
33JX4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
33JX4
C322
10KJ
C333
10KJ
C326
10KJ
C321
10KJ
C332
10KJ
BR91
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
BR90
BR89
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
BR88
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
33JX4
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
BR93
33JX4
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
BR92
C330
10KJ
C320
10KJ
R315
10KJ
VCC3
(1,2,3,4)
(9)
PB_NCS1
(5) (PB_NAE0)
(5) (PB_NWE)
(5) (PB_NOE)
KDS226
D46
(9)
MODEM_IN
(5) (/RD)
(MDM_IRQ)
1KJ
VCC3
R317
(9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0]
C102
0.1U
(9,10) PB_DATA[7:0]
C334
NM
MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector)
MCU_D7
MCU_D6
MCU_D5
MCU_D4
MCU_D3
MCU_D2
MCU_D1
MCU_D0
MODEM_IN
(/RD)
MCU_nCS
MCU_INT
PB_NCS1
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(PB_NOE)
(/FAX_RST)
#MDM_IRQ
#PB_ADDR7
#PB_ADDR6
#PB_ADDR5
#PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR3
#PB_ADDR2
#PB_ADDR1
#PB_ADDR0
#PB_DATA7
#PB_DATA6
#PB_DATA5
#PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA3
#PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA1
#PB_DATA0
CP11
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
(MDM_IRQ)
24V
0603SFF150FM/32-2
C323
NM
VCC3
C331
NM
CP13
TP903
C335
NM
L16
0J <1608>
C325
NM
(/FAX_RST)
(PB_NWE)
PB_NCS1
#PB_ADDR1
#PB_ADDR3
#PB_ADDR5
#PB_ADDR7
#PB_DATA1
#PB_DATA3
#PB_DATA5
#PB_DATA7
MCU_nCS
MCU_D0
MCU_D2
MCU_D4
MCU_D6
MODEM_IN
C329
NM
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
CN5
#MDM_IRQ
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
#PB_ADDR0
#PB_ADDR2
#PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR6
#PB_DATA0
#PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA6
MCU_INT
(/RD)
MCU_D1
MCU_D3
MCU_D5
MCU_D7
To Modem PWB
PGND
L14
0J <1608>
EN5V
TP904
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP12
C337
NM
0603SFF150FM/32-2
C324
NM
C328
NM
C336
NM
13/16
(2)
CL
33P
R323
15KJ
C341
R324
56KJ
C338
47U/35V
24V
R318
910J
Q5 2SJ537
PGND
Q6
KTC3198
CP18
0603SFF150FM/32-2
D49
11EQS06
TWKA-221K
L12
220UH
47U/35V
+ C339
Copy Lamp Inverter
R321
MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section)
5.6KJ1/4W<3216>
R319
15KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>
C340
VCL
(5)
mt_at_home
R320
1KJ
1000P
C342
R322
12KJ
VCC3
KDS226
D48
AFE_SCK#
ADCLK#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_CP#
CCD_RS#
CCD_TG#
(2) AFE_DB[7..0]
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
VCL
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#6
PGND
CP14
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
0603SFF150FM/32-2
12V
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
BR87 33JX4
47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P
(5)
AFE_SDI#
BSAMP#
VSAMP#
AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7
VCL
(5)
(5)
(5)
AFE_SEN#
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#7
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#3
L17
1J <1608>
C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
PGND
14/16
CP15
0603SFF150FM/32-2
TP886
EN5V
BR86 33JX4
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
FF4-32-S15D5
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
CN4
To Scanner unit

B
TP672
TP673
TP674
TP676
TP678
TP679
TP680
TP717
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
VCC3
/ACK_O
BUSY_O
PE_O
SLCT_O
/FAULT_O
/STB_I
/AUTOFD_I
/SLCTIN_I
/INIT_I
/REV_O
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
/ACK_O
BUSY_O
PE_O
SLCT_O
/FAULT_O
/STB_I
/AUTOFD_I
/SLCTIN_I
/INIT_I
/REV_O
R402
L18
0J <1608>
TP905
EN5V
NM
8
7
6
5
8 BR94 33JX4
7
6
5
BR95 33JX4
L19
0J <1608>
TP906
24FMN-BTK-A
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN39
C346
0.1U
C345
0.1U
VCC3
To NIC PWB
0.1U
C343
0.1U
C344
EN5V
15/16
0.1U
C106
12P
C388
PARAD[7..0]
12P
C387
CP19
(2)
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
12P
C389
/NIC_RST
12P
C391
(5)
(1) /RES_NIC
12P
C390
R326
1KJ
R327
NM
12P
C392
12P
C393
0603SFF150FM/32-2
MCU PWB (NIC I/F section)
CP20
12P
C394
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(1)
(5)
CRUMSCL
/ASIC_RST
(1) CRUMSDA
R337
3.3V
0J
3.3V
TP883
GND
Vcc
2
3
5
1
4
TC7SET08F
IC51
FB8
EN5V
TC7SBD385AFU
OE
IC49
FB9
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
R335
10KJ
F-GND 2
F-GND 1
TP887
TP884
5V
C348
0.1U
EN5V
0.1U
C350
R341
10KJ
TP715
R334
NM
VCC3
CRUM Control
MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section)
(CRUMSCL)
(CRUMSDA)
5V
R348
FB10
24V
NM
2
4
6
8
10
R279
10J
EN5V
(White)
FB11
FB12
KDS226
D34
F-GND 5
F-GND 4
F-GND 3
(Red)
KDS226
D35
R281
R280
300J
300J
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
FB14
FB15
To DV Unit with CRUM

(To Analog Tonner Sensor)
To DV Unit
(To Analog Tonner Sensor)
NM_B4B-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
CN6
B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
1
3
5
7
9
CN7
24V
TP721
PGND
TCS
DVSEL
TCS_AN
(6)
(8)
(8)
F-GND 7
F-GND 6
16/16
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
OP-CLK
Open
C308
KRC106S
Q302
3.3V
R324
0J
R323
10KJ
3
Q303
KRA225S
3.3V
TP1
R326
0J
Q305
KRA225S
R304
100J
R302
0.1u
C322
R325
0J
Q304
KRA225S
R303
TP11
TP13
5V
TP14
100J
100J
TP2
TP3
LTL-1LHG-002A
SCAN
LED306
LTL-1LHG-002A
PRINT
LTL-1LHG-002A
FAX
LED305
LTL-1LHG-002A
CS2L
LED307
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LED308
CS1L
LED302
COPY
LED301
C306
C307
1000p 1000p open
C305
R305
0J
R306
OPEN
R327
820J
open
C323
TB62725AF
IC304
TP4
LTL-1LHG-002A
SPFL
LED314
LTL-1LHEE-002A
HPL
LED304
TP12
LTL-1LHG-002A
RPL
LED310
LTL-1LHG-002A
BPL
LED309
OPEN
SJAL
LED303
DATA1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
LCDDB[7..4]
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDDB7#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB4#
LCDE#
LCDRS#
PSL
LCDE
R333
LCDRS
LCDCONT
R328
10kJ
R332
R331
R330
R329
R334
R335
KRC106S
Q307
100J
C332
100p
C327
100p
C328
100p
C329
100p
C330
100p
C331
100p
OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section)
5
16
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
0J
TP15
LCDE#
LCDDB4#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#
LCDRS#
R301
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GPM181C0
GND
V5
VDD
RS
R/W
E
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7
IC301
LTL-1LHG-002A
PSL
LED311
5VEN
1/3
To LCD
ZENER_3.3V
D304
R344
100J
470J
5VEN
0.1u
C338
/OUT0
TP5
VCC
/OUT1
2
S-IN
3
TP6
/OUT2
4
TP7
CLOCK
/OUT3
/LATCH
10
13
TP8
/OUT4
14
TP9
/ENABLE
11
/OUT5
TP10
S-OUT
12
/OUT6
R-EXT
15
/OUT7
GND
1
0.1u
C333
2. OPERATION PWB
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
5V
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
Open
Open
C310
C311
Open
C309
47pF
C315
Open
Open
Open
KEYIN
C320
C319
BZR
C318
2kJ
R346
2kJ
R347
0.1u
PSW
5V
1
0.1u
C312
C321
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
33J
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
KRC106S
R317
R316
R315
R318
R338
R337
R336
Q306
TP25
5V
16
16
6
4
5
Open
C304
74HC151
GND
VCC
IC302
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
10kJ
A
B
C
G
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
74HC238
GND
G1
G2A
G2B
A
B
C
VCC
IC303
R339
TP16 1
TP17 2
TP18 3
TP24
BZ301
PS1720P02
OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section)
2kJ
R348

SKQNABD010
PSW
TP34
TP35
TP36
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP19
KEY310
11
10
9
7
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7
5VEN
R314
R313
R312
R311
R307
R308
R309
R310
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
1SS133
D303
1SS133
D302
1SS133
D301
Open
C337
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC3
2kJ
R342
SKQNABD010
MENU
KEY324
SKQNABD010
LK
KEY325
SKQNABD010
ESRT
KEY321
Open
C335
2kJ
R341
F-KEYIN1
SKQNABD010
NM5K
KEY319
SKQNABD010
NM8K
KEY323
SKQNABD010
NM2K
KEY320
Open
C334
2kJ
R340
F-KEYIN2
SKQNABD010
NM3K
KEY317
SKQNABD010
CLK
KEY318
SKQNABD010
NM6K
KEY322
Open
C313
2kJ
R319
F-KEYIN3
SKQNABD010
ASTK
KEY308
SKQNABD010
NM0K
KEY309
SKQNABD010
RAT
KEY316
NM9K
KEY306
Open
C314
2kJ
R320
F-KEYIN4
SKQNABD010
CAK
KEY307
SKQNABD010
SHPK
KEY315
SKQNABD010
Open
C316
2kJ
R321
F-KEYIN5
SKQNABD010
EXP
KEY305
SKQNABD010
ENT
KEY313
SKQNABD010
RK
KEY314
Open
C317
2kJ
R322
F-KEYIN6
SKQNABD010
NM7K
KEY304
SKQNABD010
NM4K
KEY311
SKQNABD010
NM1K
KEY312
Open
C336
2kJ
R343
F-KEYIN7
SKQNABD010
2SIDE
KEY303
SKQNABD010
BPK
KEY302
SKQNABD010
MODK
KEY301
2/3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
OP-LATCH
PSL
PSW
OP-DATA
OP-CLK
C302
47uF/16v
LCDDB[7..4]
0.1u
C325
C301
47uF/16v
0.1u
C326
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BM15B-GHS-TBT
CN301
To FAX Key PWB
F-KEYSC3
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYIN7
F-KEYIN6
F-KEYIN5
F-KEYIN4
F-KEYIN2
F-KEYIN3
F-KEYIN1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
DATA1
S3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
CN303
DRST
To Drum Initial Detector
3/3
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
DRST
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
KEYIN
KEYSC3
KEYSC2
KEYSC1
BZR
LCDCONT
LCDRS
LCDE
0.1u
5VEN
TP57
TP55
TP56
TP54
TP39
TP40
TP41
TP42
TP43
TP44
TP45
TP46
TP47
TP48
TP49
TP50
TP51
TP52
TP53
TP38
TP37
C324
C303
47uF/16v
5V
32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB
CN302
3.3V
To MCU PWB
OPERATION PWB (Connector section)
Open
R352
1
2
3
4
5
MPFS
SOLENOID
PPD1
CED1
PD1
CED1
D-GND
CASSETTE PAPER
SOLENOID
RESIST ROLLER
SOLENOID
TONER MT
MAIN MT
INT24V
PGND
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
POLYGON MT
24V
P-GND
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A
LD
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
DHAI-0519QSPZ
- HSYNC
D-GND
+5V
D-GND
- LDEN
- VIDEO
- S/H
D-GND
FAX Model only
POD
Duplex Model only
DUPLEX MT
SHIFTER MT
Fan MT
Thermistor
PPD2
D-GND
LEDPPD2
PPD2
D-GND
CN27
24VSFTMT
/SFTMT_0
/SFTMT_1
/SFTMT_2
/SFTMT_3
DSW
CN24
1 LEDPPD1
2 PPD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-R
DHAI-0289QSZZ
CN10
1 24V
2 24V1(DSWS)
B2P-VH-R
CN14
1
24V
2
/MPFS
3
5
4
MFD
5
DGND
B5B-PH-K-R
CN21
1 CED1
2 D-GND
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-K
CN15
1 24V
2 /CPFS1
3
B3B-PH-K-S
CN18
1 24V
2 /RRS
3
B3B-PH-K-E
CN25
1 TMA_O
2 TMB_O
B2P-VH
CN12
1 INT24V
2 PGND
3 /MMD
4 MMLD
5 /MMCLK
B5B-PASK-1
CN28
1
2 PD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-M
DHAI-0269QSZZ
DHAI-0514QSPZ
DHAI-0423QSZZ
CN41
1 24V
2 P-GND
3 /PMD
4 PMRDY
5 PMCLK_A
B05B-CZHK-B
CN26
1 LEDPOD
2 POD
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S
CN20
1 24VDupMT
2 /DMT_0
3 /DMT_1
4 /DMT_2
5 /DMT_3
B05B-XASK-1
1
2
3
4
5
CN16
1 VFMOUT
2 FANLK
3 /VFMCNT
4 PGND
B4B-PH-K-S
CN11
1 LEDPPD2
2 PPD2
3 D-GND
4 RTH_IN
5 D-GND
B5B-PH-K-S
DHAI-0529QSP1
DHAI-0272QSZZ
DHAI-0287QSZZ
CN42
1 /SYNC
2 D-GND
3 INT5V
4 D-GND
5 /LDEN
6 /VIDEO
7 SHOLD
8 D-GND
B08B-CZHK-B
1
2
3
DHAI-0530QSP1
DHAI-0286QSZZ
1
2
3
MCU
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
CN2
D-GND
9
P-GND
10
D-GND
11
3.3VIN
12
EN5V
13
3.3VIN
14
5V
15
/POFF
16
12VIN
17
18
24V
FW
19
24V
20
/PR
21
HLOUT
22
P-GND
23
P-GND
24
B24B-PNDZS-1
CN2
INT5V
1
INT24V
2
P-GND
3
P-GND
4
/BIAS
5
/TC
6
/GRIDL
7
/MC
8
B24B-PNDZS-1
CN6
24V
1
TCS
2
DVSEL
3
D-GND
4
B4B-PH-K-R
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN7
5VEN
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
D-GND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
CN4
P-GND
1
P-GND
2
VCL
3
VCL
4
12V
5
12V
6
EN5V
7
D-GND
8
(VSAMP)
9
CCD-TG
10
D-GND
11
CCD-RS
12
(BSAMP)
13
CCD-CP
14
(AFE_SDI)
15
CCD_PHI2
16
D-GND
17
CCD_PHI1
18
(AFE_SEN)
19
(ADCLK)
20
D-GND
21
(AFE_SCK)
22
(AFE_DB7)
23
mt_at_home
24
(AFE_DB5)
25
(AFE_DB6)
26
D-GND
27
(AFE_DB4)
28
(AFE_DB3)
29
(AFE_DB2)
30
31
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)
32
FF4-32-S15D5
CN22
OUTA+
1
OUTB+
2
OUTA3
OUTB4
B4B-PH-K-R
CN3
D-GND
BL
INFOLED
OP_LATCH
D-GND
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
PSW
PSL
DRST
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDE
LCDRS
LCDCONT
BZR
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
KEYIN
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
D-GND
EN5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
VCC3
D-GND
DHAI-0525QSPZ
DHAI-0525QSPZ
DHAI-0516QSPZ
DHAI-0268QSZ4
DHAI-0517QSPZ
P-GND
P-GND
VCL
VCL
12V
12V
EN5V
D-GND
(VSAMP)
CCD-TG
D-GND
CCD-RS
(BSAMP)
CCD-CP
(AFE_SDI)
CCD_PHI2
D-GND
CCD_PHI1
(AFE_SEN)
(ADCLK)
D-GND
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_DB7)
MHPS
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
D-GND
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)
CN302
D-GND
BL
INFOLED
OP_LATCH
D-GND
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
PSW
PSL
DRST
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDE
LCDRS
LCDCONT
BZR
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
KEYIN
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
D-GND
EN5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
VCC3
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
D-GND
P-GND
D-GND
3.3VIN
EN5V
3.3VIN
5V
/POFF
12VIN
24V
FW
24V
/PR
HLOUT
P-GND
P-GND
INT5V
INT24V
P-GND
P-GND
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MC
BIAS
F-GND
DHAI-0526QSPZ
D-GND
CN303
DRST
1
2
3
POWER
SUPPLY
PWB
L
N
HLN
HLL
MC
1
2
BC
1
2
3
1
4
1
2
TC
MCFB
GRID
CCD
PWB
VCL
P-GND
CN301
F-KEYSC3
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYIN7
F-KEYIN6
F-KEYIN5
F-KEYIN4
F-KEYIN3
F-KEYIN2
F-KEYIN1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
DATA1
D-GND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
BIAS
DHAI-0267QSPZ
DHAI-0292QSZZ
DHAI-0273QSZZ
DHAI-0515QSPZ
1
2
6
5
8
1
2
6
5
8
CN3
AC VOUT
GND
INVERTER
PWB
CN2
AC VOUT
GND
HLL
HLN
DHAI-0491QSZZ
AC-INLET
For 200V area
AC-CORD
For 120V area
1
2
1
3
1
3
DRST
AL MODEL ONLY
1
2
DV
un
HL
THERMOSTAT
AC-CORD
DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area)

DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area)
TCS
CCFL
CCFL
FAX_OPE
PWB
FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only
DRST
D-GND
CN401
15 F-KEYSC3
14 F-KEYSC2
13 F-KEYSC1
12 F-KEYIN7
11 F-KEYIN6
10 F-KEYIN5
9 F-KEYIN4
8 F-KEYIN3
7 F-KEYIN2
6 F-KEYIN1
5 LED_V3
4 LED_V2
3 LED_V1
2 DATA1
1 D-GND
1
2
SCANNER
Carriage
UN
SCANNER
MT
DHAI-0543QSPZ
DHAI-0270QSZZ
DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area)

DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
LCD_OPE
PWB
HVT PWB
AR model only
CRUM
2 5VEN
4 (CRUMSDA)
3 (CRUMSCL)
1 P-GND
P18-FX-4S-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM
(1) MCU section (1/3)
MCU
PWB
B24B-PNDZS-1
CN30
LED_SRJD
DGND
SRJD
LED_SPPD
DGND
SPPD
LED_SCOD
DGND
SCOD
LED_SPID
DGND
SPID
24VSPFSOL
SPUS
24VSPFSOL
SRVC
SPMT_3
24VSPFMT
SPMT_1
SPMT_0
24VSPFMT
SPMT_2
24VSPFSOL
NC
1
3
5
2
4
6
7
9
11
8
10
12
17
19
21
23
14
22
16
20
24
18
13
15
DHAI-0533QSPZ
1
2
3
2
1
24V
_SPUS
LED_SRJD
D-GND
SRJD
1
2
3
2
1
24V
SRVC
LED_SPID
D-GND
SPID
3
2
1
1
2
LED_SPPD
D-GND
SPPD
3
2
1
1
2
3
2
1
3
2
1
DHAI-0539QSPZ
DHAI-0541QSPZ
LEDSRJD
DGND
SRJD
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1

/B
COMB
B
A
COMA
/A
SRVC
SPUS
LEDSPID
DGND
SPID
LEDSCOD
DGND
SCOD
LEDSPPD
DGND
SPPD
DHAI-0540QSPZ
3
2
1
SPMT
SPID
SCOD
SPPD
SRJD
RSPF UNIT
(2) RSPF section (2/3)
1
2
2nd CASSETTE UN
CED2
CED2
D-GND
1
2
PD2
D-GND
PD2
AR-D33 only
3
2
1
5V
PPD3
D-GND
PPD3
CPFS2
2
1
/CPFS2
24V
2
1
DHAI-0442QSZZ

/CPFS2
24V
5V
PPD3
D-GND
PD2
D-GND
CED2
D-GND
FG
1
2
4
7
8
9
11
13
14
6
3
5
10
12
AR 2nd cassette / AR-D33

Model only
14
13
11
8
7
6
4
2
1
9
12
10
5
3
AL 2nd cassette
Model only
DHAI-0306QSZZ
B14B-PHDSS-B
CN19
/CPFS2
24V
5V
PPD3
D-GND
PD2
D-GND
CED2
D-GND
DHAI-0441QSZZ
1
2
4
7
8
11
12
13
14
3
5
6
9
10
MCU PWB
(3) 2nd cassette section (Optional)
To
LAN
To
LAN
2
3
PJ1
VCC
GND
AC adapter
NW Box
PWB
CN9
VBUS
DD+
GND
FG
CN1
D-GND
DIR3
/IT3
/SELIN3
/AFFFD3
/STB
/FLT
SLCT
PFRR
PBSY
/PACK
P7
P6
P5
P4
P3
P2
P1
P0
/RESET
VCC3
5V
5V
D-GND
AR-NB2A Optional Model only
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN8
TPTX+
TPTXTPRX+
NC
NC
TPRXNC
NC
ST_LED
5V
LK_LED
5V
CN8
TX+
TXCT
NC
NC
CT
RX+
RXLeftLED_A
LeftLED_K
RightLED_A
RightLED_K
NIC
PWB
AL-2050CS/AL-2060 only
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
USB Cable
DHAI-0518QSPZ
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
CN1
5V
DD+
GND
FG
CN39
1 D-GND
2 /REV
3 /INIT
4 /SLCTIN
5 /AUTOFD
6 /STB
7 /FAULT
8 SLCT
9 PE
10 BUSY
11 /ACK
12 PARAD7
13 PARAD6
14 PARAD5
15 PARAD4
16 PARAD3
17 PARAD2
18 PARAD1
19 PARAD0
20 /OA_RST
21 VCC3
22 EN5V
23 EN5V
24 D-GND
24FMN-BTK-A
L
N
DHAI-0544QSPZ
1
2
MCU
PWB
CN3
1 L
3 N
POWER
SUPPLY
PWB
CN5
1 MODEM_IN
2 D-GND
3 MCU_D6
4 MCU_D7
5 MCU_D4
6 MCU_D5
7 MCU_D2
8 MCU_D3
9 MCU_D0
10 MCU_D1
11 MCU_nCS
12 /RD
13 PB_DATA7
14 MCU_INT
15 PB_DATA5
16 PB_DATA6
17 PB_DATA3
18 PB_DATA4
19 PB_DATA1
20 PB_DATA2
21 PB_ADDR7
22 PB_DATA0
23 PB_DATA5
24 PB_ADDR6
25 PB_ADDR3
26 PB_ADDR4
27 PB_ADDR1
28 PB_ADDR2
29 PB_NCS1
30 PB_ADDR0
31 PB_NWE
32 PB_NAE0
33 FAX_RST
34 PB_NOE
35 24V
36 MDM_IRQ
37 VCC3
38 EN5V
39 D-GND
40 P-GND
DHAI-0538QSPZ
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39
CN2
MODEM_IN
D-GND
MCU_D6
MCU_D7
MCU_D4
MCU_D5
MCU_D2
MCU_D3
MCU_D0
MCU_D1
MCU_nCS
/RD
PB_DATA7
MCU_INT
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_ADDR7
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_NCS1
PB_ADDR0
PB_NWE
PB_NAE0
FAX_RST
PB_NOE
24V
MDM_IRQ
VCC3
EN5V
D-GND
P-GND
CN3
1 BT1
2 LT1
B02B-PH-K-S
To
TEL
Communication
Line
To
TEL
Communication
Line
MJ1
1 NC
2 NC
3 L1
4 L2
5 NC
6 NC
Speaker
MJ2
1 BT1
2 LT1
3 TEL1
4 TEL2
5 LT2
6 BT2
FAX
Main
PWB
FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only
(4) Network box and FAX section (Optional)
2) Select "Option" "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.
[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD

PROCEDURES
[Preparation]
Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit.
A USB port is required for the PC.
Create "MaintenanceTool " flooder in the PC, and copy the following
files to the folder.
Necessary for program download

Maintenance.exe ( Tool program)
ProcModelQ.fmt
ProcModelQ.mdl
Driver
Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista)
Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000)
3) Set the serial number according to the following.
Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE)

Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE)
Download file
Download file (extension .dwl)
Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in
which the maintenance program is included.
When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do
not put a long folder name in the absolute path.
[Example]
Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download
Proper case:
c:\MaintenanceTool
1. Initial setting
(Serial number setting procedures)
The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading.
Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again
when rebooting the program.
Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default
data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading
firmware only.
1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
(Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected
to the machine.)
Product Code (P): Enter number (0 99)

Enter the product code of "3."
ID Code(I): Enter number (0 99)
Assign an individual code to each PC uses
"Maintenance.exe."
After completion setting, press [OK] key.
4) The serial number has been assigned.
2. Download procedures
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM
program write mode).
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of

the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to
the USB port on the main unit without fail.
3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
AR-208S/208D
FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 1
4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program.
8) PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.
5) PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boosted

and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of
display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
9) PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is performed automatically.

6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/
IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector
is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.)
10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message

is displayed.
7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the

main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download
DWL Data Area" in the sub trees.
Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data write
state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this
moment.
11) Main unit side: Wait until "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel. When "DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!" is displayed, download is completed.
Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB
cable.
12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON
the machine again.
Download is completed with the above procedures.
AR-208S/208D
Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cable

again and select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar of
the integration maintenance program. Repeat the above procedures from 5).
4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on the

integration maintenance program.
5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The

copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
* Inhibition during download (Important)

If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use
great care not to execute the following items during download.
Never turn off the machine.
Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).
* If the above inhibition item occurs during

downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.
1) When "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation
panel, execute the download procedure again.
2) If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed on the operation
panel, turn OFF the power and press and hold [C] key and
[ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) and turn ON the power. Check
that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel,
and execute the download procedure again.
If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed, replace the MCU
with a new one.
3. Version acquisition procedures

6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/

IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation

panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
AR-208S/208D
7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the

main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in
the sub trees.
4) PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program.
5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The

copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the
display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
8) Check that the following display is shown.
With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed.

The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The
downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as
shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version".
6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/

IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure

EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data
maintenance of EEPROM.
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation
panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
AR-208S/208D
7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to

develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area"
in the sub trees.
5. Installing procedures
<USB integration maintenance program installation>
Driver installation is made on plug-and-play.
<Installation on Windows Vista>
Check that "d" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel.
(Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key)
together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)
3) The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select
[Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
8) PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."
Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is

displayed. Press [Agree] button.
4) The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown.
Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.].
9) PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is

displayed.
With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed.

Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are
saved in a file with extension of .eep.
AR-208S/208D
5) When the following display is shown, select [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
8) The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool

driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button.
6) The following display is shown.
9) When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver

software anyway].
10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to

complete installation.
7) Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the
maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] button.
AR-208S/208D
<Installation on Windows XP>

5) Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver

(Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button.
(Suppose that the driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)

3) The following display is shown.
Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next>
button.
6) Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance

tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.
4) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 7).
7) When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway]

button.
AR-208S/208D
8) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.
5) Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.
Press <Finish> button.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the

integration maintenance program is completed.
<Installation on Windows 2000>
6) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 9).
3) Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and
press <Next> button.
7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver

(Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.
4) Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press

<Next> button.
AR-208S/208D
8) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> button.
(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
<Installation on Windows Me>

3) The following display is shown on the PC side.
Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> button.
9) Press <Next> button to start installation.
4) Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes the

maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, and
press <Next> button.
If the search location does not include the maintenance tool
driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf).
(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)

11) Restart the PC.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the
AR-208S/208D
5) Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver

(Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button.
(Suppose that the driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next>
button.

8) Restart the PC.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the
AR-208S/208D
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
Solder composition
Solder composition code
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish)
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES"
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Vista and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and ReaderTM are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and other countries.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 January Printed in Japan

Service Manual: Digital Multifunctional System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Digital Multifunctional System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

This document has been published to be used

At the production line, the output power

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT

The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V

7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport

EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES

Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter

Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)

SB = Manual feed single bypass,

Second cassette unit

Original feed unit

Duplex original feed unit

Color scanner function

GDI printer function with USB

SPLC printer function

Auto duplex copy function

Job separator function

Interface port (parallel)

Interface port (USB)

Interface port (Network)

2. Note for servicing and handling

Tray paper feed section

Paper exit section

1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets)

Heat roller system

50 - 200% when using RSPF (151 steps in 1% increments)

Manual steps (manual, photo)

10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON)

(paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100

4.5mm or less (total of both sides)

Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (RSPF)

Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed)

First print time

* Varies depending on the PC performance.

*1: Engine Resolution

Flat Bed Color Scanner

Original position: Platen: Left center / RSPF: Right center

*1: Running change

A4 about 13 sheets (65%)

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)

Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French.

Supply storage condition

Normal operating condition

Temperature: 20C to 25C

Acceptable operating condition

3. Production control number (lot No.)

AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it

Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the

1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a

4. Toner cartridge replacement

AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

Fusing unit release lever